You are on page 1of 292

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

___________________
Preface
Mechanical Configuration of
an Automation System with
SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1
___________
SIMATIC
Automation Systems
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital
2
___________________
Modules
SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog
3
___________________
Modules
SIMATIC S7 HART Analog
4
___________________
Modules

A
___________________
Certificates
B
___________________
Standards and licenses
C
___________________
Service & support

09/2014

A5E00172008-11

Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products


Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY

A5E00172008-11
07/2014 Subject to change

Copyright Siemens AG 2014.


All rights reserved

Preface
Purpose of the manual
This manual will help you to
plan,
install,
and operate a SIMATIC S7 ex module for an automation system in a hazardous area.

Basic knowledge required


General knowledge of automation engineering is required to understand this manual.
You should be familiar with the fundamentals of explosion protection, with the identification
of explosion-protected equipment and with the regulations regarding explosion protection.

Validity of the manual


This manual is valid for all the SIMATIC S7 ex modules listed by order number in the
following table.
Table 1

S7-300 I/O modules


SIMATIC S7 ex module

Order number

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA

6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/420mA HART

6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0

For information on CPUs or IM 153-x versions which support this module, refer to the
STEP 7 Hardware Catalog.

Changes since the previous edition of the manual


The section below outlines the changes this manual contains compared to the previous
version:
The HART analog modules 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0 and 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0 have
been added.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Preface

Position in the information scheme


Depending on the application, you will need the following documentation to understand this
manual:
S7-300: Hardware and Installation, CPU data, module specifications and instruction list
ET 200M: Distributed I/O device
Distributed I/O Devices S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M: Manual

Guide
The manual covers the following subject areas:
At the beginning of this manual you will find a complete table of contents.
Chapter 1 explains the mechanical configuration of an automation system with SIMATIC
S7 Ex modules
Chapter 2 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules
Chapter 3 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex analog modules
Chapter 4 describes the SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules
Important terms are explained in the glossary.
You can use the index to find the key parts of the manual.

Approvals
See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 265)

CE marking
See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 265)

Mark for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)


See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 265)

Standards
See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 265)

Recycling and disposal


You can recycle the Ex I/O modules because they are made of low-toxicity materials. To
recycle and disposal of your old device in an environmentally friendly way, please contact a
company certified to deal with electronic waste.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Preface

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules ............................... 17


1.1

Use ...............................................................................................................................................17

1.2

Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications ................................................................................17

1.3

The LK 393 line chamber .............................................................................................................20

1.4

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules .........................................................................23

1.5

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules ......................................................................26

1.6

Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems ................................................................27

1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.5
1.7.6
1.7.7

Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems ...............................................................................................30


General information .....................................................................................................................30
Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits ...........................................................32
Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits ...........................................32
Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14 ................................................................................33
Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14 ...............................................34
Types of cables ............................................................................................................................35
Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection ...........................................38

1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5

Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage ......................................................39


Shielding ......................................................................................................................................39
Equipment Shielding ....................................................................................................................39
Line Shielding...............................................................................................................................40
Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages ...........................................................................42
The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC ....................................................................44

1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
1.9.8

Lightning Protection .....................................................................................................................45


Measures .....................................................................................................................................45
External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings ...................................................................46
Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M .............................................................46
Shielding of Cables and Buildings ...............................................................................................47
Equipotential bonding for lightning protection ..............................................................................47
Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................................................48
Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection.......................................................................49
Lightning Strike ............................................................................................................................50

1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3

Installation Work in Hazardous Areas ..........................................................................................51


Safety Measures ..........................................................................................................................51
Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2 ...............................................................................53
Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1 ...............................................................................53

1.11

Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus ...........................................................................................57

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules ............................................................................................................ 59


2.1

Chapter overview .........................................................................................................................59

2.2

Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) .....................................59

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Features and technical specifications ......................................................................................... 59


Parameterization ......................................................................................................................... 66
Diagnostic messages .................................................................................................................. 68
Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 70

2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4

Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) ........................... 73


Features and technical specifications ......................................................................................... 73
Parameterization ......................................................................................................................... 80
Diagnostic messages .................................................................................................................. 82
Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 84

2.4
2.4.1

Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) ............................ 85


Features and technical specifications ......................................................................................... 85

2.5

Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules ................................................................ 92

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules ........................................................................................................... 95


3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15
3.1.16
3.1.17
3.1.18
3.1.19
3.1.20

Analog value representation ....................................................................................................... 95


Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values ............................................. 95
General information about the display of analog values within the measuring ranges of
analog inputs ............................................................................................................................... 95
Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges........................................................ 97
Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges ........................................................ 98
Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders .................................. 99
Analog value representation for the standard temperature range .............................................. 99
Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100 ................................. 100
Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range .............................................. 101
Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100 ................................... 102
Analog value representation for the temperature range type B ................................................ 103
Analog value representation for the temperature range type E ................................................ 104
Analog value representation for the temperature range type J................................................. 105
Analog value representation for the temperature range type K ................................................ 105
Analog value representation for the temperature range type L ................................................ 106
Analog value representation for the temperature range type N ................................................ 107
Analog value representation for the temperature range type R ................................................ 108
Analog value representation for the temperature range type S ................................................ 109
Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T .................................... 110
Analog value representation for the temperature range type U ................................................ 111
Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs ................................. 112

3.2

General information on wiring technology ................................................................................. 113

3.3

Wiring transducers to analog inputs .......................................................................................... 114

3.4

Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD ............................ 116

3.5

Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors ......................... 121

3.6

Using thermocouples ................................................................................................................ 122

3.7

Connecting voltage sensors ...................................................................................................... 125

3.8

Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x


0/4...20 mA ................................................................................................................................ 126

3.9

Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA ........ 127

3.10

Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules ................................................................ 128

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.10.5
3.10.6
3.10.7

Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels .............................................................128


Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output Channels .....129
Parameters of Analog Modules ..................................................................................................130
Diagnostics of the Analog Modules............................................................................................135
Interrupts of analog modules .....................................................................................................139
Characteristics of Analog Modules ............................................................................................141
Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules ..............................................................143

3.11

Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) .............................146

3.12

Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) .............................158

3.13

Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) .........................166

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules ................................................................................................... 175


4.1

Using HART analog modules.....................................................................................................175

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3

Introduction to HART .................................................................................................................177


Definition of HART .....................................................................................................................177
HART functions ..........................................................................................................................178
Application of HART ...................................................................................................................180

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3

Guidelines for Installation and Operation ...................................................................................182


Example configuration ...............................................................................................................182
Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices ..........................................................183
Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices ............................................184

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
4.4.6.2
4.4.6.3
4.4.6.4
4.4.6.5
4.4.6.6

HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 ..........................................................................................185


Parameters of HART Analog Modules .......................................................................................185
Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules ........................................................................188
Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules ....................................................................................189
HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0) .........190
HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0) .....198
Data record interface .................................................................................................................205
Parameter Data Records ...........................................................................................................206
Diagnostic data records .............................................................................................................208
HART Communication Data Records ........................................................................................210
Additional diagnostic data records .............................................................................................214
Additional parameter data records .............................................................................................216
User data interface .....................................................................................................................217

4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.7.1
4.5.7.2
4.5.7.3
4.5.7.4
4.5.7.5

HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 ..........................................................................................219


Configuring HART variables ......................................................................................................220
Parameters of HART Analog Modules .......................................................................................222
Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules ........................................................................225
Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules ....................................................................................230
HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0) .........231
HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0) ....238
Data record interface .................................................................................................................245
Parameter Data Records ...........................................................................................................247
Diagnostic data records .............................................................................................................250
HART communication and information data records .................................................................252
Example of HART programming ................................................................................................257
User data interface .....................................................................................................................259

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

Certificates...........................................................................................................................................263
A.1

Standards and licenses ........................................................................................................................265


B.1

Overview of diagnostic functions .............................................................................................. 263


Standards and licenses ............................................................................................................. 265

Service & support.................................................................................................................................271


C.1

Service & support ...................................................................................................................... 271

Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................273
Index ...................................................................................................................................................285
Tables
Table 1

S7-300 I/O modules ....................................................................................................................... 3

Table 1- 1

Cables and lines ........................................................................................................................... 33

Table 1- 2

Contents of EN 60079-14, continued ........................................................................................... 34

Table 1- 3

Minimum cross sections of copper conductors in accordance with ............................................. 35

Table 1- 4

Types of cables ............................................................................................................................ 35

Table 1- 5

Siemens cables for measurement and control to DIN VDE 0815 ................................................ 38

Table 1- 6

Shielding of Ex lines in the hazardous area ................................................................................. 42

Table 1- 7

Comparison of data for inductance and capacity ......................................................................... 48

Table 1- 8

Example of the comparison of data for inductance and capacity ................................................ 48

Table 1- 9

Safety Measures .......................................................................................................................... 52

Table 1- 10

Working on systems to type of protection: Ex de [ib] T5 .. T6 ..................................................... 55

Table 2- 1

Static and dynamic parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR ........................................................ 66

Table 2- 2

Allocation of 4 digital input channels to the 4 channel groups of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR .......... 67

Table 2- 3

Parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR ....................................................................................... 67

Table 2- 4

Delay times of input signal for SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR ............................................................... 68

Table 2- 5

Diagnostic messages of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR ........................................................................ 69

Table 2- 6

Diagnostic messages as well as their causes and remedies in SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR .......... 69

Table 2- 7

Dependencies of the input values for CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM
321; DI 4 x NAMUR ...................................................................................................................... 71

Table 2- 8

Static and dynamic parameters ................................................................................................... 80

Table 2- 9

Assignment of the four channels to the four channel groups of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA
and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA ................................................................................................... 81

Table 2- 10

Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA ............................ 81

Table 2- 11

Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA .............................. 83

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

10

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

Table 2- 12

Diagnostic messages as well as their causes of error and remedies for the SM 322; DO
4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA ........................................................................... 83

Table 2- 13

Dependencies of output values on the CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM
322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA .......................................................... 85

Table 3- 1

Characteristics of Analog Modules .............................................................................................. 95

Table 3- 2

Representation of the smallest stable unit of the analog value ................................................... 96

Table 3- 3

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (voltage measuring
range) ........................................................................................................................................... 97

Table 3- 4

Displaying the digitized measured values SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4.... .20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ...
.20mA HART analog input modules............................................................................................. 98

Table 3- 5

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (resistance sensor) .......... 99

Table 3- 6

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
standard; Pt 100, Pt200) .............................................................................................................. 99

Table 3- 7

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
standard; Ni 100)........................................................................................................................ 100

Table 3- 8

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
climatic; Pt 100, Pt200) .............................................................................................................. 101

Table 3- 9

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
climatic Ni 100)........................................................................................................................... 102

Table 3- 10

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type B) ........................................................................................................................................ 103

Table 3- 11

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type E) ........................................................................................................................................ 104

Table 3- 12

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type J) ........................................................................................................................................ 105

Table 3- 13

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type K) ........................................................................................................................................ 105

Table 3- 14

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type L) ........................................................................................................................................ 106

Table 3- 15

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type N) ........................................................................................................................................ 107

Table 3- 16

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type R) ........................................................................................................................................ 108

Table 3- 17

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type S) ........................................................................................................................................ 109

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

11

Table of contents

Table 3- 18

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type T) ........................................................................................................................................ 110

Table 3- 19

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type U) ........................................................................................................................................ 111

Table 3- 20

Representation of analog output range of analog output modules (current output ranges) ...... 112

Table 3- 21

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD ........................................ 132

Table 3- 22

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA ......................................... 133

Table 3- 23

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA ..................................... 134

Table 3- 24

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x


0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ................................................................................... 136

Table 3- 25

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x


0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART - their possible causes of fault and remedies ........... 137

Table 3- 26

Diagnostic message of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA ........................ 138

Table 3- 27

Diagnostic messages of analog output module SM 332; AO 4x0/4...20mA and their


possible causes and remedies ................................................................................................... 138

Table 3- 28

Dependencies of analog input/output values on the CPU operating status and the supply
voltage L+ ................................................................................................................................... 141

Table 3- 29

Characteristics of analog modules dependent on the position of analog input value in


value range ................................................................................................................................ 142

Table 3- 30

Characteristics of analog modules dependent on position of analog output value in value


range .......................................................................................................................................... 142

Table 3- 31

Allocating analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD to channel groups ........... 149

Table 3- 32

Connectable thermocouples and thermal resistors ................................................................... 151

Table 3- 33

Allocation of analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA to channel groups ....... 161

Table 3- 34

Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers ........................................................... 161

Table 3- 35

Allocation of 4 channels to 4 channel groups of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA .................... 168

Table 3- 36

Output ranges of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA ................................ 169

Table 4- 1

Examples of HART parameters ................................................................................................. 179

Table 4- 2

Examples of universal commands ............................................................................................. 179

Table 4- 3

Examples of common-practice commands ................................................................................ 180

Table 4- 4

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ............................... 186

Table 4- 5

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ........................... 187

Table 4- 6

Additional diagnostic messages for the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA
HART and the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ................................. 188

Table 4- 7

Additional diagnostic messages, possible causes of the errors, and remedies ........................ 189

Table 4- 8

Local data in OB40 ..................................................................................................................... 190


S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

12

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

Table 4- 9

Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ....................... 191

Table 4- 10

Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA ....................................... 199

Table 4- 11

Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module .......... 206

Table 4- 12

Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module ........................... 207

Table 4- 13

HART group error displays ........................................................................................................ 213

Table 4- 14

HART protocol error during response from field device to module ............................................ 213

Table 4- 15

Additional parameters of the HART analog modules................................................................. 216

Table 4- 16

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ............................... 223

Table 4- 17

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ........................... 224

Table 4- 18

"Analog" diagnostic messages ................................................................................................... 226

Table 4- 19

Diagnostic messages of analog input module, causes of error and remedies .......................... 227

Table 4- 20

Additional HART diagnostic messages of the analog input module .......................................... 228

Table 4- 21

Additional HART diagnostic messages, possible causes of errors and remedies .................... 229

Table 4- 22

Local data in OB40 .................................................................................................................... 230

Table 4- 23

Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ....................... 232

Table 4- 24

Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA ....................................... 239

Table 4- 25

Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module .......... 247

Table 4- 26

Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module ........................... 248

Table 4- 27

Overview .................................................................................................................................... 252

Table 4- 28

HART group error displays in response byte 1 (extended response control) ............................ 256

Table 4- 29

HART protocol error in response byte 2 for the response from the field device to the
module (error code) ................................................................................................................... 256

Table 4- 30

FC80: Writing of the record to DB80 with SFC 58 ..................................................................... 258

Table 4- 31

DB80: Transparent Message Format......................................................................................... 258

Table 4- 32

DB80: Compact Message Format.............................................................................................. 259

Table 4- 33

FC81: Reading of the reply to DB81 with SFC 59 ..................................................................... 259

Table B- 1

Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 269

Figures
Figure 1-1

Connecting the LK 393 line chamber ........................................................................................... 21

Figure 1-2

Inserting the connecting cables of the load voltage in the line chamber. Outside diameter
of the wires > 2 mm (viewed from below) .................................................................................... 22

Figure 1-3

Insert the L+ line in a loop in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires < 2 mm
(viewed from below) ..................................................................................................................... 22

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

13

Table of contents

Figure 1-4

LK 393 line chamber when connected ......................................................................................... 23

Figure 1-5

Spacing dimensions for a two-tier S7-300 configuration ............................................................. 24

Figure 1-6

Wiring between L+/M lines and Ex modules via connecting elements ........................................ 25

Figure 1-7

Two subracks with ET 200M ........................................................................................................ 26

Figure 1-8

Main and secondary equipotential bonding to VDE ..................................................................... 28

Figure 1-9

Example of equipotential bonding in M&C systems ..................................................................... 29

Figure 1-10

Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards ...................................... 36

Figure 1-11

Shielding and equipotential bonding conductors for non-Ex circuits ........................................... 40

Figure 1-12

Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits ...................................................................... 48

Figure 1-13

Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station ................................................... 50

Figure 1-14

SIMATIC Ex modules in hazardous area ..................................................................................... 54

Figure 2-1

Wiring diagram of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR.................................................. 61

Figure 2-2

Block diagram of the digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR ............................................. 62

Figure 2-3

Start Information of OB40: which event has triggered the process interrupt ............................... 72

Figure 2-4

Block diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA .............................................................................. 74

Figure 2-5

Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA .......................................... 75

Figure 2-6

Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA ............................................................................ 86

Figure 2-7

Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA .......................................... 87

Figure 3-1

Connection of insulated transducers to an isolated analog input module ................................. 115

Figure 3-2

Connection of non-insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module ........ 116

Figure 3-3

Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation box to the electrically isolated


analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD ...................................................................... 117

Figure 3-4

Wiring of electrically isolated thermocouples to a compensation box and "0 C


compensation" measurement type with analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD....... 118

Figure 3-5

Wiring of thermocouples to analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD via a


reference junction regulated to 0C or 50C .............................................................................. 119

Figure 3-6

Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation by means of thermal resistance-type


sensors (Pt100, for example) ..................................................................................................... 120

Figure 3-7

Wiring of thermocouples with internal compensation to an electrically isolated analog


input module ............................................................................................................................... 121

Figure 3-8

Wiring of resistance thermometers to the electrically isolated analog input module SM


331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD .............................................................................................................. 122

Figure 3-9

Measuring circuit with thermocouple .......................................................................................... 123

Figure 3-10

Wiring of voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x
TC/4 x RTD ................................................................................................................................ 125

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

14

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Table of contents

Figure 3-11

Wiring 2-wire transducers to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA
HART analog input modules ...................................................................................................... 126

Figure 3-12

Wiring 4-wire transducers with external power supply to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA
and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART analog input modules ................................................................ 127

Figure 3-13

Connection of loads to a current output of the electrically isolated analog output module
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA ....................................................................................................... 128

Figure 3-14

Cycle time of an analog input module ........................................................................................ 129

Figure 3-15

Response time of the analog input channels ............................................................................. 130

Figure 3-16

Start Information of OB40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt ...................................................................................................................................... 141

Figure 3-17

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD ................................................ 147

Figure 3-18

Module view and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA ........................................... 159

Figure 3-19

Module view and block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA .............................................. 167

Figure 4-1

Location of the HART analog modules in the distributed system .............................................. 176

Figure 4-2

The HART signal ........................................................................................................................ 178

Figure 4-3

System environment required for HART .................................................................................... 181

Figure 4-4

Use of a HART analog module in a sample configuration ......................................................... 182

Figure 4-5

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ...................................... 192

Figure 4-6

Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART............................... 200

Figure 4-7

Parameters of the HART analog input module .......................................................................... 206

Figure 4-8

Parameters of the HART analog output module ........................................................................ 207

Figure 4-9

Diagnostic data: data record 0/1 ................................................................................................ 208

Figure 4-10

Diagnostic data: data record 1 ................................................................................................... 209

Figure 4-11

Command data record of the HART analog module .................................................................. 211

Figure 4-12

Response data record of the HART analog modules ................................................................ 212

Figure 4-13

Diagnostic data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules......................................... 214

Figure 4-14

Diagnostic data record 130 of the HART analog modules ........................................................ 215

Figure 4-15

Diagnostic data records 131 and 151 of the HART analog module .......................................... 215

Figure 4-16

Parameter data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules......................................... 216

Figure 4-17

Input user data area of the HART analog modules ................................................................... 218

Figure 4-18

User data area of the HART analog output module................................................................... 219

Figure 4-19

Example of a configuration of HART variables .......................................................................... 221

Figure 4-20

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART ...................................... 233

Figure 4-21

Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART............................... 240

Figure 4-22

Parameters of the HART analog input module .......................................................................... 247

Figure 4-23

Parameters of the HART analog output module ........................................................................ 248

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

15

Table of contents

Figure 4-24

Data record................................................................................................................................. 249

Figure 4-25

Diagnostic data: data record 0 ................................................................................................... 250

Figure 4-26

Diagnostic data: data record 1 ................................................................................................... 251

Figure 4-27

Command data record of the HART analog module .................................................................. 254

Figure 4-28

Response data record of the HART analog modules ................................................................ 255

Figure 4-29

Input user data area of the HART analog modules ................................................................... 260

Figure 4-30

User data area of the HART analog output module ................................................................... 261

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

16

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System


with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules
1.1

Use

Overview
The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules can be used in the systems:
S7-300,
ET 200M.
The HART analog modules SM 331; AI 2 x 0/420mA HART and SM 332; AO
2 x 0/4...20mA HART can be used in the ET 200M system.
For installation purposes, you must therefore comply with the configuration guidelines as
specified in the corresponding manuals. In addition, further reference guidelines for SIMATIC
S7 Ex modules are provided in this section. These must be taken into consideration.

1.2

Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications

Note
Note
Ex systems may only be installed by authorized personnel.

Approvals
The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following approval
II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4. This means they can be installed in a non-hazardous
area and also in zone 2 (category 3G) if certain conditions are adhered to. Only intrinsically
safe electrical equipment (actuators/sensors) permitted in zones 1 and 2 can be connected
to the SIMATIC S7 Ex modules. The approval applies to all potentially explosive gas
mixtures in Groups IIC. The safety-related limits can be found in the certificates of
conformity.
The certificates of conformity and explanations of the designations can be found on the
Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

17

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications

FM approval
The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following FM approvals:
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Therefore, the modules can be used in areas that contain volatile flammable liquids or
flammable gasses which are normally within closed vessels or systems, from which they can
only escape under abnormal operating or fault conditions. The approval applies to all test
gasses. A surface temperature no greater than 135 C (T4) occurs at ambient temperatures
of 60 C.

Safe extra low voltage


SIMATIC S7 Ex modules must be operated with a "safe functional extra low voltage". The
module may thus only be subject to a fault voltage of U < 60 V. You can find more detailed
information on the safe extra low voltage in, for example, the data sheets for the power
supplies to be used.
All system components which can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill
this condition. This includes in particular:
the power supply module PS307. It fulfills this condition.
the MPI interface. It fulfills this condition when all users operate with safe extra low
voltage. SIMATIC automation systems and programming units also fulfill this condition.
115/230 V modules. Even if they are used in another cell or in another programmable
controller they must feature safe extra low voltage on the system side (i.e. towards the
backplane bus).
Any other current circuit (24 VDC) integrated in the system must be operated with ESLV.
Refer to the corresponding data sheets or consult the manufacturer.
Note that the I/O modules also support the connection of sensors and actuators with
auxiliary power supply. Also ensure a safe extra low voltage is used in this case. The voltage
level of the process signal at a 24 V digital module may never reach a fault voltage Um
> 60V. This also applies to non-intrinsically safe components.
Note
All power sources such as the internal or external 24 VDC load voltage supplies and the 5 V
bus voltage must be appropriately interconnected galvanically, so that voltage addition as a
result of potential differences is not liable to generate a fault voltage which exceeds Um. You
can achieve this state, for example, by referencing all power sources of the system to
functional ground. Also refer to the instructions provided in the relevant manuals (see
Foreword) for this purpose. The maximum possible fault voltage Um in the system is 60V.

Minimum thread measure


A minimum thread measure of 50 mm must be maintained between connections with safe
functional extra low voltage and intrinsically safe connections. The process connector
features a cable chamber in order to meet this requirement.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

18

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications
Certain module components may prevent you from maintaining this thread measure. In this
case, you should install a DM 370 dummy module, and set it up so that it does not use any
address space. If you use the ET 200M Distributed I/O, you should observe the information
regarding the configuration.
Also take care with regard to the wiring to ensure this specified spacing is maintained
between intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe connections.

Combined use of Ex and non-Ex I/O modules


Combined use is possible, however, the minimum thread measure between conductive parts
of Ex and non-Ex modules must be maintained in all cases. As a rule, you must install a DM
370 spacer module between Ex and non-Ex modules. Always separate the intrinsically safe
from the non-intrinsically safe wiring. They must be routed in separate cable ducts. A mixed
operation is therefore not recommended.

Partition
The Ex partition must be fitted to achieve the minimum thread measure of 50 mm between
Ex and non-Ex modules when using the bus module of the active backplane bus.

Load current circuit


Power is supplied to the Ex sensors and actuators (to 4-wire transducers, for example) either
from the Ex modules, or via separate, intrinsically safe power supply modules.
The Ex I/O modules receive their power supply via the backplane bus. The 24VDC load
voltage input of the front connector is required for the power supply of the Ex sensors and
the Ex actuators on the majority of modules.

Connecting Ex I/O modules


The Ex I/O modules are configured in the same way as standard modules from left to right.
Wire the Ex sensors and actuators to the process connector, include any load voltage supply
using the cable chamber, and then plug the connector into the module.
Note
If necessary, a safety assessment of this intrinsically safe power circuit should be carried out
by an expert before a sensor or actuator is connected to an Ex module.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

19

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

Replacing Ex I/O modules


After being plugged in for the first time, the front connector adopts the module type coding
set at the factory. This setting prevents you from unintentionally replacing the module with a
different type, i.e. the front connector's mechanical coding prevents snap-on mounting on an
incorrect module type. thus fulfilling explosion protection requirements. When replacing Ex
modules, carry out the necessary steps in the order described below:
Configuration
1. Disconnect the L+ load voltage supply
2. Unplug the front connector
3. Remove the module
Mounting
1. Install the module
2. Plug in the front connector
3. Connect the L+ load voltage supply

See also
Overview of diagnostic functions (Page 263)
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)

1.3

The LK 393 line chamber

Scope of application
With the exception of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, all Ex I/O
modules require a 24V DC load voltage supply via the process connector. Safety isolation of
this signal in order to maintain the minimum thread measure between Ex and non-Ex areas
is achieved by using the LK 393 line chamber (Order No. 6ES7393-4AA00-0AA0). Process
signals are carried downward while the 24V supply is routed upward in separate ducts.
When using the LK 393 line chamber, you must always use the front connector with screwtype contacts. If you use the front connector with spring contacts, the front door of the
module can no longer be closed.

Connecting the line chamber


1. The lines of the L+ and M connections are cut to the required length, their insulation is
stripped and wire end ferrules are fitted.
2. The conductor ends with the ferrules are passed through the openings in the LK 393 line
chamber until they are flush with the fastening pins.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

20

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.3 The LK 393 line chamber
3. The conductors are then pressed into the guide ducts of the LK 393 line chamber and
routed upward (secure with hot-melt adhesive if necessary).
4. The line chamber pre-assembled in this way is now inserted in the terminals of the front
connector.
5. The wire end ferrules of L+ and M are screwed to the terminals 1 and 20 and the
fastening pins to terminals 2 and 19.
This ensures a firm connection of the line chamber with the front connector, thus fulfilling
explosion protection safety requirements.
The following figs.illustrate the configuration.

Load voltage supply

Process connector with screw-type connection

Ex (i) process cables

Line chamber

Figure 1-1

Connecting the LK 393 line chamber

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

21

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

Wire end ferrule

Diameter > 2 mm

Figure 1-2

Inserting the connecting cables of the load voltage in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires > 2 mm
(viewed from below)

Wire end ferrule

Diameter < 2 mm

Figure 1-3

Insert the L+ line in a loop in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires < 2 mm
(viewed from below)

Note
Use Ex I/O modules which require a 24V load voltage exclusively with the LK 393 line
chamber. It is necessary for ensuring the modules are used for their intended purpose.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

22

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

Figure 1-4

LK 393 line chamber when connected

You can, of course, also use Ex I/O modules for non-intrinsically safe tasks. You will not
need the line chamber in this case. However, you must then clearly and permanently cancel
the Ex identification symbol. Subsequent use for Ex applications is no longer possible unless
you return the module to the manufacturer for testing.

1.4

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

General information
Physical isolation of non-Ex signals from Ex signals corresponds to the requirements with
regard to the configuration of explosion-protected automation technology. If the minimum
distance of 50 mm between bare connection terminals of Ex modules and bare connection
terminals of non-Ex modules can not be maintained, a DM 370 spacer module (order
number 6ES7 370-0AA00-0AA0) must be fitted between these modules. Care must be taken
to ensure that all automation systems are routed to a common ground.
This means:
All earthing screws of the sectional rails must be referred to a common ground.
The earthing clip of all CPUs must be locked in position.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

23

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

Spacing for arrangement on several subracks


The following figure shows the spacing dimensions between the individual subracks as well
as to adjacent items of apparatus, cable ducts, cabinet panels etc. for a two-tier S7-300
configuration.

Figure 1-5

Spacing dimensions for a two-tier S7-300 configuration

L+ supply

EX CABLE DUCT

NON-EX (24V) CABLE DUCT

If you maintain these minimum spacing dimensions then:


you will guarantee heat dissipation of the S7-300 modules
you will have sufficient space to insert and remove the S7-300 modules
you will have sufficient space for installing lines
Note
If you use a shield support element, the specified dimensions apply as from the lower
edge of the shield support element.
The L+/M lines on the Ex modules can be wired directly or via connection elements.
For direct wiring, route the L+/M lines from the cable duct (if a line chamber is used) directly
to the terminals of the module front connector. You can route the Ex process lines directly
from the front connector to the apparatus.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

24

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules
You can use commercially available clamp-type distributors for wiring via connection
elements. You then have the option of disconnecting the L+/M supply lines module by
module by means of a plug connector (see Fig. below).

Non Ex-cable duct

Connection elements

15 mm top-hat rail

Ex modules

Ex cable duct

Figure 1-6

Wiring between L+/M lines and Ex modules via connecting elements

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14 (Page 33)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

25

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules

1.5

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules

ET 200M configurations on two subracks


The Figure shows you two ET 200M configurations on two subracks. Place a DM 370
dummy module between the IM153 and the first Ex I/O module in such a way that it doesn't
occupy any address area. If you are using an active backplane bus, use an Ex partition
(order number 6ES7195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy module.

NON-EX CABLE DUCT

EX CABLE DUCT

S7-300 modules

S7-300 modules

Figure 1-7

Two subracks with ET 200M

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

26

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

1.6

Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

General
Potential differences may develop between the bodies of electrical equipment which are
bonded to a protective conductor and the conductive elements of the construction which do
not belong to the electrical equipment, for example, the piping. The bridging of such potential
differences may cause ignition sparks. Equipotential bonding requires that conductive metal
parts which are not touch-protected are interconnected with the ground conductor. A
practical central point for equipotential bonding is the distribution cabinet. The cross-section
of the equipotential conductor should at least be equivalent to that of the corresponding
protective conductor. In all other situations, the minimum cross-section of the equipotential
conductor is 10 mm2 Cu.
The backplane bus and I/O power circuits of Ex modules feature galvanically isolated, i.e.
equipotential bonding is not required for these modules. Exception: Connection to the
equipotential conductor if this is necessary for reasons of measuring technology. Where
lightning protection devices are required in the intrinsically safe circuit, they must be
connected to the EB conductor at the same point as the shield of the intrinsically safe
circuits.
Generally speaking, the measures described in EN 60079-14 should be used or adhered to.
Generally, cable racks must be incorporated throughout the earthing system.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

27

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

Equipotential bonding in buildings


All buildings must be equipped with an equipotential bonding facility, to VDE 0100, Parts 410
/ 540 and to DIN VDE 0185, which is interconnected with the overall cabling of the
automation system. Such facilities if missing must be installed.

Figure 1-8

Main and secondary equipotential bonding to VDE

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

28

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

Main equipotential bonding


This interconnects the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus:
APA = 0.5 x APE main
PE conductor
Main ground conductor
Earth termination
Main water pipes
Main gas pipes
other metal piping systems
Metal structural elements of the building (if possible)
power and information system cables extending beyond the building, via lightning
conductor.

Additional equipotential bonding


Connecting the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus:
All "extraneous conductive elements" such as structural elements, supports, containers,
piping (these can themselves form EB conductors), APA = 0.5 x APEmax (A = cable cross
section) from the distrib. board.
The bodies of stationary electrical equipment which can be touched simultaneously, if
interconnected with PEN (PE connection is sufficient otherwise), AEQ = 0.5 x APE of both
appliances.

Figure 1-9

Example of equipotential bonding in M&C systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

29

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

See also
Measures (Page 45)

1.7

Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

1.7.1

General information

Measures
Neither the electrical installation nor the required materials for this such as cables, lines and
installation materials are subject to the special test procedure of ElexV with respect to their
design. The responsibility of plant personnel or of an installation company for the proper
installation of an Ex system is particularly high on account of the risk of explosion in the
event of improper implementation.
General planning principles for cable routes are very similar to those for piping. At the
drafting stage of installation plans and building layouts, areas with increased risk of fire and
danger zones must be defined in accordance with ElexV and VbF. The focus should be set
on cable and piping tray installations in low-risk areas. Furthermore, accessibility and ease of
maintenance must be ensured, also for subsequent expansion. The cabling and line duct
passages between the control rooms and operational danger areas must be sealed
appropriately in order to prevent any ingress of dangerous gases or fumes into the control
room.
Note
Laying cables in ducts in the floor should be avoided. There is the risk
of the penetration or the formation of potentially explosive gas / air mixtures and their
uncontrolled propagation,
penetration of corrosive liquids.
The flexible multicore and single conductor cables used to install intrinsically safe power
circuits only require a diameter of 0.1 mm. For implementation in the Ex area, cables and
lines must primarily withstand the expected mechanical, chemical and thermal effects. It is
therefore always necessary to lay considerably larger cross sections and use cables and
lines that are flame-retardant and oil-resistant.
Intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe lines (conductors, non-sheathed cables) must be
laid separately or with appropriate insulation. Common routing in cables, lines and conductor
bundles is not permissible.
Special care must be taken to ensure full isolation in cable ducts. This can be achieved with
a continuous intermediate 1 mm layer of insulating material or by laying sheathed cables
(see following table).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

30

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

Routing of cables for intrinsically safe circuits


Cable routed in separate, insulating cable ducts

Cables routed in a common cable duct with an insulating


intermediate layer (the solid insulating intermediate layer of > 1
mm provides reliable isolation of the intrinsically safe lines in
accordance with EN 60079-11).

Any cables of intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits with common routing must be
capable of withstanding a minimum test voltage of 500 V AC.
The high insulation voltage of 500 V AC can be dispensed with if the intrinsically safe or nonintrinsically safe circuits are enclosed in a grounded shield. However, the cables of
intrinsically safe circuits must be capable of withstanding at least 500 VAC (conductorconductor-ground).
Intrinsically safe lines must be clearly marked. If a color is used, it must be light-blue. An
exception to this rule is the routing of lines within equipment, distribution panels and
switchrooms. Cables and lines thus marked must not be used for other purposes.
In general, intrinsically safe circuits must be installed in a floating arrangement. A connection
to ground via a 15 kOhm resistor, e.g. to discharge electrostatic charges, does not qualify as
a ground. Intrinsically safe circuits must be bonded to ground if necessary for reasons of
measuring technology or safety. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential
bonding system. Equipotential bonding must exist in the entire installation of intrinsically safe
circuits.
The terminal elements of systems which contain intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits,
for example, in measuring and control cabinets, must comply with EN 60079-11 directives.
The connections of the intrinsically safe circuits must be marked as intrinsically safe. Lightblue must be used if color coding is preferred.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

31

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

1.7.2

Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits

Marking
Cables and lines of intrinsically safe circuits must be marked. Where jackets or sheaths are
color-coded, light-blue must be chosen as the color. Cables and lines thus marked must not
be used for other purposes. Equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a plastic sheath
may be provided with colored longitudinal stripes as follows, according to the type of
thermocouple:
Copper/cupro-nickel (copper/constantan)

brown

Iron/cupro-nickel (iron/constantan)

dark blue

Nickel-chrome/nickel

green

Platinum-rhodium/platinum

white

In the case of equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a mineral sheath or metal braid,
a light-blue strip of sufficient width must be woven in as the color code for intrinsic safety.
Within measurement and control cabinets and in the interior of switching and distribution
systems, special measures must be taken where there is a risk of interchanging the lines of
intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits, e.g. where there is a blue neutral
conductor in compliance with DIN 47002.
The following measures are acceptable:
Bundling of conductors in a common light-blue sheath,
Labeling,
clear arrangement and physical separation.

1.7.3

Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits

Protection measures
Cable bedding made of metal must be incorporated in the protective measures to counteract
indirect contact. This can be achieved by routing an existing ground conductor made of steel
strip or with a good conductive connection between individual beds.
For single laying, conduits made of metal are now only usually used where particular
mechanical or thermal stress is developed. In general, PVC conduits of two different types
are used depending on the expected mechanical stress. Remember, however, that PVC
exhibits a linear expansion which is about 8 times that of metal. The fixing points must
therefore be such that the linear expansion is taken up.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

32

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

1.7.4

Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14

Overview
The table below once again highlights the most important cable and conductor specifications
to EN 60079-14.
Table 1- 1

Cables and lines

application
General requirements:

Requirements of cables and lines

Select according to mechanical, chemical and thermal influences


(refer to DIN VDE 0298 and DIN VDE 0891)

Protection against the distribution of fire. Cable routing in sand, for


example. Proof of combustibility properties of cables in accordance
with DIN VDE 0472 part 804, test type B.

Cu or Al conductors. Al conductors should only be used when


installing multicore cables starting at 25 mm2, or single-conductor
cables starting at 35 mm2, using suitable terminal elements.

(smaller cross section


permissible for multicore
lines with more than 5
cores, and lines for
measurement and control)

Minimum cross sections for copper


conductor:

1 mm fine,

single-core cable:

0.75 mm fine, otherwise as


above

Permissible types for


portable/mobile apparatus
(does not apply to
intrinsically safe systems)

U <= 750 V

Flexible cable H07RN or


equivalent (e.g. NSHou)

U <= 250 V

flexible cable H07RN or


equivalent

I <= 6 A

no severe mechanical
stresses

in M&C systems,

Plastic-sheathed flexible cable

note additional
requirements for "i" and
zone 0)

multi-core cable:

Wire remote control and


telecommunications system

1.5 mm solid conductor

H05VV-F minimum cross


section 1 mm2 (not at ambient
temperatures below 5 C)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

33

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems
Table 1- 2

Contents of EN 60079-14, continued


Application

Laying cables and lines

Connection of cables and lines

Requirements of cables and lines

Sealing of cable passages in Ex and non-Ex areas, for


example, by means of sand pockets, plastering or
similar.

Sealing of unused cable inlets using certified caps


(certification not required for Zone 2)

where there is particular thermal, mechanical or


chemical stress, protect cables and lines, e.g. by laying
in conduit, sheaths, metal tubing (not in enclosed
conduits)

where routed into a pressure-resistant enclosure, use


certified cable lead-in elements.

Conductors outside the appliance may only be


connected by crimping.

Conductor connections within apparatus should use


suitable clamps, multicore or fine conductor ends should
be secured against separation

Crimp connections can be protected with cast resin


applications or heatshrink sleeves, provided these are
not subject to mechanical stress.

See also
Types of cables (Page 35)

1.7.5

Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14

Specification
Cables and wires laid in hazardous areas do not require a test certificate in accordance with
Elex V. The electrical data of cables used for intrinsically safe M&C circuits must be specified
(for example, capacitance at 200 nF/km, inductivity at 1 mH/km).
The following applies within a group cable:
The insulation between lines of intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits must
withstand an alternating voltage of 2U + 1000 V, but at least 1500 V, where U is the sum of
rms voltage values of the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

34

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems
Table 1- 3

Minimum cross sections of copper conductors in accordance with


Cable type

Number of
cores

Power cables and lines in


accordance with DIN VDE 0298,
Part 1, 3

1
2-5
>5

1
0,75
0,5

1,5
1,5
1

Wiring cables and lines in


accordance with DIN VDE 0891,
Parts 1, 5, 6 for voltages

>1

0,5

0,5

0,8

2
>2
2 (shielded)

0,5
0,28
0,28

0,5
0,28
0,28

0,8
0,6
0,6

< AC 60 V or
120 V DC

1.7.6

Flexible
Solid
stranded
conductor mm2
conductor mm2

Conductor
diameter mm

Types of cables

Overview
Suitable process signal cables are installation cables for industrial electronic systems
(SIMATIC cable) with bundled twisted-pair, color-coded conductors. Cables with a solid
conductor (0.5 mm2 cross section, 0.8 mm diameter) have a static shield. Cables with flexible
stranded conductors (J-LIYCY) have a braided shield (C) made of copper wires.
Table 1- 4

Types of cables
Cable designation

Cable for

A-Y(St) YY

nx2x0.8/1.4 BdSi

Outdoor cable (burying in ground1)

J-Y(St) Y

nx2x0.8/1.4 BdSi

Normal applications

J-LiYY

nx2x0.5/1.6 BdSi

Compact control stations

J-LiYCY

nx2x0.5/1.6 BdSi

Vibration and impact stresses


Connector installation

1 Direct

burying in ground is not recommended.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

35

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards


The type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards are listed in the
following:

Basic type

rated voltage

5
6

insulating material

sheath material

Special features
Conductor

harmonized type

national type

03

300/300 Volt

05

300/500 Volt

07

450/750 Volt

PVC

Rubber

silicon rubber

PVC

Rubber

cloroprene rubber

glass fiber braid

fabric braid

ribbon cable, separable

H2

ribbon cable, not separable

single-core

multi-core

fine (permanently installed)

fine (flexible)

extra fine wire

tinsel

Number of cores

...

Number of cores

protective conductor

without protective conductor

with protective conductor

conductor cross section

...

specified in mm2

Figure 1-10

Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

36

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines


Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines are listed in the following:

Basic type

Supplement

Insulating material

Design features

Outdoor cable

Mining cable

Wiring cable

Sheathed cable

Switchboard cable

Lightning protection system

Induction-protected

Electronics

PVC

2Y

Polyethylene

O2Y

Cellular PE

5Y

PTFE

6Y

FEP

7Y

ETFE

PAPER

Petrolatum filler

Aluminum sheath

LD

Corrugated aluminum

(ST)

Aluminum tape

(K)

Metal foil shield

Copper tape shield

Corrugated steel sheath

Mz

Lead sheath

Special lead sheath

Armoring

Jute sheath & ground


Compound layer + tape

Sheath material

Number of elements

(refer to 3. Isolation)
Number of stranding elements

Stranding element

Single core

Pair

Conductor diameter

...

in mm

Stranding element

Star quad (railway)

St

Star quad (phantom)

St I

Star quad (long distance cable)

St III

Star quad (local cable)

TF

Star quad for TF

Signal cable (railway)

PiMF

shielded pair

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

37

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems
10

Type of stranding

11

Sheath color

Table 1- 5

Lg

Layer stranding

Bd

Unit stranding

BL

blue

Siemens cables for measurement and control to DIN VDE 0815


Cable designation

Order Number

JE-LIYCY

2x2x0.5 BD SI BL

V45483-F25-C15

JE-LIYCY

16x2x0.5 BD SI BL

V45483-F165-C15

JE-LIYCY

32x2x0.5 BD SI BL

V45483-F325-C55

JE-Y(ST)Y

2x2x0.8 BD SI BL

V45480-F25-C25

JE-Y(ST)Y

16x2x0.8 BD SI BL

V45480-F165-C35

JE-Y(ST)Y

32x2x0.8 BD SI BL

V45480-F325-C25

JE-Y(ST)Y

100x2x0.8 BD SI BL

V45480-F1005-C15

Characteristic values of cables for intrinsically safe circuits


Example: Cable type JE-LiYCY
Coupling

200 pF/100 m

at 800 Hz

Working capacity

c. 200 nF/km

at 800 Hz

Working inductance

c. 1 mH/km

Minimum bending radius for permanent installation

6 x line diameter

Temperature range, permanent installation

- 30 C to 70 C

for moveable use


Test voltage

- 5 C to 50 C
core/core 2000 V,
core/shield 500 V,

Loop resistance

1.7.7

c. 80 /km

Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection

Requirements
These must be identifiable, for example by their type designation, and the following
constructional requirements must be observed:
Clearance in air and leakage path in accordance with EN 60079-0/EN 60079-11 between
two connection elements of different intrinsically safe circuits must be at least 6 mm.
Clearance in air and leakage path between connection elements of each intrinsically safe
circuit and grounded metal parts must be not less than 3 mm.
Marking of connection elements must be unambiguous and easily recognized. When a
color is used for this purpose, it must be light blue.
The following must also be observed with regard to the use of terminals:

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

38

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage
Connection terminals of intrinsically safe circuits must be at a distance of at least 50 mm
from connection elements or bare conductors of any non-intrinsically safe circuit, or must be
isolated from it by an insulating partition or grounded metal partition. When such partitions
are used, they must extend at least by up to 1.5 mm from the housing panels, or must
ensure a minimum clearance of 50 mm between connection elements, measured around the
partition in all directions.
The insulation between an intrinsically safe circuit and the chassis of the electrical apparatus
or parts which may be grounded must withstand an alternating rms voltage of twice the
voltage value of the intrinsically safe circuit, but at least 500 V.

1.8

Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

1.8.1

Shielding

Definition
Shielding is a method of attenuating magnetic, electric or electromagnetic interference fields.
Shielding can be subdivided into
Equipment Shielding
Line Shielding

1.8.2

Equipment Shielding

General information
Particularly observe the following when cabinets and housings are incorporated in control
system shielding:
Cabinet covers such as side panels, rear panels, top and bottom panels, must make
contact in an overlapping arrangement at adequate distances (e.g. 50 mm).
Doors must be given additional contact with the cabinet ground. Use several grounding
strips.
Lines exiting the shielded housing should either be shielded or routed via filters.
Where the cabinet contains sources of severe interference (transformers, lines to motors,
etc.), they must be partitioned from sensitive electronic areas with metal plates. The metal
plates must have several low-impedance bolted joints to the cabinet ground.
Interference voltages picked up in the programmable controller via non-Ex signal and supply
lines are diverted to the central ground point (standard sectional rail).
The central ground point should have a low-impedance connection to the PE conductor via a
copper conductor (> = 10 mm2) which is as short as possible.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

39

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

1.8.3

Line Shielding

Non-Ex circuits
Both ends of the cable shields are usually bonded to cabinet potential at a suitable
conductive point. Satisfactory suppression of all frequencies picked up can only be achieved
by shielding at both ends.

Shielding of systems with optimal equipotential bonding


Vital aspects in the optimization of a system's EMC properties are the shielding of system
components and, in particular, of their connecting cables, and that the system shielding
forms an encompassing electrical shell. The significance of this requirement increases with
the scope of signal frequencies processed in the systems. In ideal cases, the cable shields
are connected to the housings which are often metal or corresponding shielding of the
connected field devices. Since, as a rule, they are linked to chassis ground (or to the PE
conductor), the shield of the signal cable is grounded at several points. This procedure is
optimum for electromagnetic compatibility and personal protection. It can be applied in these
systems without any restrictions.

Figure 1-11

Shielding and equipotential bonding conductors for non-Ex circuits

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

40

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

Ex circuits
Three aspects must be considered with regard to the design of shielding and grounding of an
S7-300 system:
Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Explosion protection
Personal protection

Grounding and shielding of intrinsically safe circuits


EN 60079-14 stipulates general equipotential bonding in potentially explosive environments
in order to prevent potential differences and resultant sparking. The equipotential bonding
system must be designed and implemented to DIN VDE 0100!
In accordance with EN 60079-14, intrinsically safe circuits are generally not grounded. They
must be grounded if this is required for safety reasons. They can be grounded if this is
required for functional reasons. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential
bonding system.
Intrinsically safe signal lines and cables are shielded in order to meet measuring technology
requirements or to prevent inductive coupling, because the system often generates low
signal levels.
The section below outlines the procedures of planning the equipotential bonding of
intrinsically safe signal lines:
Metal enclosures with safe contact to construction elements as a result of their mounting
fixtures are integrated in the system's equipotential bonding circuit and thus do not
require separate grounding.
The shielding is grounded at only one point in order to avoid looping. In Zone 1, 2 and 21
systems, the shielding is grounded outside the danger area, i.e. ideally in the
measurement control system.
The cable shields must be isolated from devices operated in the potentially explosive zone.
The measured value is routed via twisted-pair signal cable (single cable) to a distribution
cabinet, and from there to the measuring room via multicore cable. The shield is insulated at
all intermediate points.
In Zone 0, the cable shield is connected to equipotential ground by wiring it directly to the
device connection housing (usually Zone 1). The apparatus is grounded directly via the
ground conductor.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

41

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

Shielding of lines in the hazardous area


Table 1- 6

Shielding of Ex lines in the hazardous area

Ex area

Non-Ex area
SIMATIC Ex modules

(1) Sensor or actuator


(2) shield
(3) line

(1) Shield support with strain relief

(1) strain relief


(2) insulation

(2) cable shield

1.8.4

Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages

Assembling the control system


Measures to suppress interference voltages are often only implemented when the control
system is already in operation and proper reception of a useful signal is impaired.
Expenditure involved with such measures (special relays, for example) can be reduced
considerably when installing the control system by making allowances for the items outlined
below.
Included here:
favorable arrangement of equipment and lines
grounding of all inactive metal elements
filtering of power cables and signal lines

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

42

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage
shielding of equipment and lines
special interference-suppression measures

Physical arrangement of equipment and lines


Magnetic DC or AC fields of low frequency, such as 50 Hz, can only be sufficiently
attenuated at great expense. In such a case, however, you can often solve the problem by
providing the greatest possible distance between the interference source and sink.
Note
The analog Ex modules operate based on a method which suppresses faults caused by AC
system ripple.

Grounding of inactive metal elements


Well implemented grounding is an important factor for interference-free assembly. Grounding
is understood to mean a good electrical connection of all inactive metal elements (VDE
0160). The principle of surface grounding should be followed. All conductive, inactive metal
elements should be grounded!
Observe the following when grounding:
All ground connections must have a low impedance.
All metal elements should have a large-area connection. Use particularly wide grounding
strips for the connection. The surface of the ground connection and not only its cross
section is decisive.
Screw-type connections should always have spring washers or lock washers.

Protection against electrostatic discharge


In order to protect the devices and modules against electrostatic discharge, these should be
installed in fully enclosed metal housings or cabinets which feature proper conductive
connections both to the grounding busbar at the installation location and to the main
equipotential conductor.
You should preferably use cast iron or steel sheet enclosures. Plastic housings should
always have a metallized surface.
Doors or covers of housings should be connected to the grounded body of the housing with
ground strips or contact springs.
If you are working on the system with the cabinet open, observe the guidelines for protective
measures for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESDs).
The risk of ignition as a result of electrostatic charge must be safely excluded in the system
installation. Refer to "Guidelines for avoiding the risk of ignition resulting from electrostatic
charges" laid down by the main association of Industrial Employers' Liability Insurance.
If electrostatic charges cannot be avoided, the charge should be kept as low as possible or
safe discharge should be provided. The following measures, in particular, should be applied:

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

43

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage
Electrostatic grounding of all conductive elements. Solid materials can be considered as
being electrostatically grounded if their leakage resistance at any point is not greater than
106 . Under favorable conditions, 108 is also satisfactory, particularly for small
equipment of low capacitance.
Reducing the electrical resistance of the material moved or parts moved with respect to
each other.
Incorporating grounded metal elements in material subject to electrostatic charging.
Increasing the relative air humidity. By increasing the relative air humidity to about 65 %
with air conditioning, sprays or by hanging moist cloths, the surface resistance of most
non-conductive materials can be adequately reduced. However, if the surface of plastic
material is water-repellent, this measure will not succeed.
Ionization of the air.

1.8.5

The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC

Overview
To ensure EMC, it is often sufficient to observe some elementary rules. When assembling
the control system, take into consideration the five following basic rules.
1. When installing the programmable controllers, ensure high quality surface grounding of
the inactive metal elements
Connect all inactive metal elements over a large area and at low impedance.
On painted and anodized metal elements, make screwed connections with special
contact washers or remove the insulating protective layers.
Provide a central connection between chassis ground and the ground/protective
conductor system.
2. When wiring always follow the code of practice for line routing
Subdivide the cabling into line groups.
(AC power cables, supply lines, Ex and non-Ex signal lines, data lines).
Always install power cables and signal or data lines in separate ducts or bundles.
Route the signal and data lines as closely as possible to grounded surfaces such as
supporting bars, metal rails, cabinet sheet metal panels.
Install Ex and non-Ex signal lines in separate ducts.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

44

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection
3. Ensure that line shields are properly secured
Data lines should be shielded when laid. The shield should be connected accordingly,
see chapter Line Shielding (Page 40).
Analog lines should be shielded when laid. When low-amplitude signals are
transmitted, it may be advantageous if the shield is connected at only one end.
For Ex signal lines, connect the line shields only at the sensor or actuator end. Ensure
the connected shield continues without interruption as far as the module, but do not
connect it there.
Make sure the shield has a low-impedance connection to equipotential ground.
Use metal or metallized plug housings for shielded data lines.
4. Implement special EMC measures for particular applications
For all inductances, fit quenching elements provided they are not already contained in
the output modules.
Use incandescent bulbs for lighting the cabinets and avoid fluorescent lamps.
5. Harmonize the reference potential and, where possible, connect all electrical components
to ground
Take care to ensure specific grounding measures. Grounding of the control system is
a protective and functional measure.
System elements and cabinets should be connected in star-configuration to the
ground/protective conductor system. In this way you can avoid the formation of ground
loops.
Install equipotential conductors of sufficient size to compensate for any potential
differences between the system components and cabinets.

1.9

Lightning Protection

1.9.1

Measures

Overview
In systems with hazardous areas, the most important task, not least for reasons of explosion
protection, is to avoid overvoltages; where this is not possible, they must be reduced and
safely discharged.
In addition to the provision of external lightning protection, these measures cover internal
lightning protection and overvoltage protection. These measures must be coordinated with
the equipment-related EMC.
You will find more detailed information on the subjects of lightning protection and overvoltage
protection in the manuals of the individual systems as specified in the foreword. Here, you
will also find an overview of the components which can be used for this purpose.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

45

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection

1.9.2

External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings

Measures
External lightning protection is a measure for preventing damage to buildings and fire
damage. For this task, a large-mesh wire cage consisting of lightning conductors and down
conductors is sufficient.
On buildings with sensitive electronic equipment such as control rooms, the external
lightning protection must be supplemented by a building shield. For these purposes, where
possible, metal facades and reinforcements of walls, floors and ceilings on or in the building
are connected to form shield cages. Where this is not possible, the lightning conductor and
down conductor should have a reduced mesh size and, where applicable, the supporting
structure of the intermediate floor should be electrically interconnected.
Electrical equipment protruding above roof level must be protected against direct lightning
strikes. When such equipment is metallically connected to the external lightning protection
system, a partial current is picked up by the building in the event of a lightning strike; this can
result in destruction of the equipment sensitive to overvoltages. The pick-up of partial
lightning currents can be prevented by protecting the electrical equipment protruding above
the roof from direct lightning strikes by means of rods insulated from the equipment (45
degree protective area), or by cage-type tensioned wires or cables.
The down conductors for external lightning protection and, if applicable, the reinforcements
and supporting structures, should be connected to the ground system. Each individual
building has its own functioning ground system. The ground systems are meshed to create a
common grounding network. The voltage between the buildings is thus reduced.

1.9.3

Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M

Measures
The process engineering of a plant, such as gas supply, requires a wide-ranging exchange
of information between the systems with the distributed Ex I/O devices and the central,
electrical or electronic measurement and control system. This necessitates a great number
of cable connections, sometimes extending over several hundred meters - in the case of gas
storage systems, over several thousands of meters. In the event of a lightning strike,
therefore, extensive voltage pick-up occurs.
A distributed arrangement of instrumentation and control equipment with relatively short
cables to the plant, and the connection of distributed I/O stations to each other and to the
central controller via a bus (PROFIBUS-DP) or fiber-optic cable, are an important measure
for reducing overvoltages between sections of the plant.
You will find more detailed information on this arrangement in the manuals specified in the
foreword.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

46

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection

1.9.4

Shielding of Cables and Buildings

Measures
Overvoltages between separate plant sections or buildings cannot be avoided in practice by
meshing. In the event of a lightning strike, a circulating current will flow over the path created
by metal connections between the buildings or between a building and I/O device. Cable
cores are ideal for this purpose. The lightning or partial lightning current must therefore be
offered other conductive connections. Shielding which can be implemented in different ways
is particularly suitable, for example:
a helical current-rated metal strip or metal braid as the cable shield, e.g. NYCY or
A2Y(K)Y.
By installing the cables in continuously connected metal conduits which are grounded at
both ends.
By installing the cables in reinforced concrete ducts with through-connected
reinforcement or on closed metal cable racks.
By laying conductors (shield conductors) in parallel with cables. This measure, however,
only relieves the cables of partial lightning currents.
or
By laying fiber-optic cables.
Overvoltage-sensitive equipment must also be shielded to ensure the currents at the cable
ends cannot destroy this equipment. This is achieved with metal housings or by installing the
equipment in metal cabinets which are connected to the ground conductor.

1.9.5

Equipotential bonding for lightning protection

Measures
"Internal lightning protection" covers all the additional measures which prevent the magnetic
and electrical effects of the lightning current within the building to be protected. These
measures include in particular "equipotential bonding for lightning protection" in order to
reduce potential differences caused by lightning current.
Internal lightning protection is based on the principle of the inclusion of all incoming and
outgoing lines of a protected volume in the equipotential bonding system for lightning
protection, i.e. in addition to the entire metal piping systems (gas, water and heating), this
includes all power and IT cables which must be wired to corresponding protective devices.
Since considerable, partial lightning currents can flow over such lines and must be
discharged by the protective devices, they must be chosen for a suitable current carrying
capacity (lightning current conductors).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

47

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection

1.9.6

Overvoltage Protection

General
Effectiveness depends very much on the connection and cable routing of the overvoltage
protection devices. When the devices are used in hazardous areas or intrinsically safe
circuits, EN60079-14 must be adhered to.
When the system is installed, the minimum igniting curves and maximum heating specified
by EN 60079-11 must be adhered to.

Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits


Overvoltage protection devices can protect intrinsically safe circuits from overvoltage.

Figure 1-12

Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits

The discussion of safety-relevant aspects is limited to the direct comparison of the data for
inductance and capacity.
Table 1- 7

Comparison of data for inductance and capacity

Ex module

Comparison

Lightning
arrester 1

Line

Lightning
arrester 2

Sensor/actuat
or

La

LBD1

+LLtg

+LBD2

+Li

Ca

CBD1

+CLtg

+CBD2

+Ci

Table 1- 8

Example of the comparison of data for inductance and capacity

Ex module

Comparison

Lightning
arrester 1

Line

Lightning
arrester 2

Sensor/actuat
or

La = 4 mH

< 0.5 H

< 50 H

< 0.5 mH

< 0.6 mH

Ca = 270 nF

< 1 nF

< 10 nF

< 6 nF

< 6 nF

The overvoltage protection elements described in this section are only effective if used
together with external lightning protection. External lightning protection measures reduce the
effects of a lightning strike.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

48

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection
You can obtain suitable lightning conductors for Ex modules from:
DEHN + SHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
http://www.dehn.de (http://www.dehn.de)

1.9.7

Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection

Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station


Fig. "Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station" shows an example of
how protective devices can be used.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

49

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.9 Lightning Protection

Figure 1-13

1.9.8

Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station

Lightning Strike

Measures
When lightning strikes an explosive atmosphere it always ignites. There is also a risk of
ignition due to an excessive rise in temperature in the lightning discharge paths. In order to
prevent, at Zones 0, 1 and 20 themselves, the harmful effects of lightning strikes occurring
outside of these zones, surge diverters, for example, must be fitted at suitable points.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

50

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas
Overground metal tank systems which are equipped with electrical appliances or electrically
conductive components which are electrically isolated to the container require equipotential
bonding, for example, of measuring and control equipment and of the filling tubes.
Note
Lightning protection equipment and grounding systems must be tested by an expert upon
their completion and at regular intervals. In conjunction with ElexV, an inspection interval of
three years is specified for electrical and lightning protection systems operated in potentially
explosive rooms.
Summary:
Enhanced external lightning protection (reduced mesh size, increased number of down
conductors) on all buildings and systems.
Meshing of grounding systems in the building to create area grounding.
Meshed equipotential bonding.
Fitting of lightning conductors and surge diverters in the power system.
Fitting of overvoltage fine-protection devices at both ends of measurement and control
cables.
Shielding of M&C cables.
M&C cables with twisted pairs of cores.

1.10

Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

1.10.1

Safety Measures

Introduction
All possible measures which eliminate the risk of explosion must be implemented not only
when using programmable controllers in hazardous areas but also during the installation
stage.

Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work


Tools which tend to produce sparks must not be used for working in potentially explosive
systems or system sections in operation. Copperberyllium is a suitable material for tools
such as screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, hammers and chisels. Since this material has low
wear-resistance, the tools should be used with care.
Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

51

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

low

when bare steel elements strike each other

possible

when steel elements collide or drop

great

when striking rusty steel

very great

when striking rusty steel with an alloy coating (e.g. aluminum paint)

The possibility of creating sparks capable of causing ignition is substantially reduced by


using non-sparking tools. Exception: when the tool is harder than the workpiece.

Measures for eliminating the risk of explosion


Safely closing off the working area, e.g. with dummy panels.
Good ventilation of the rooms.
Flushing with inert gas. Testing the effectiveness of the flushing (gas tester). Then
working with a normal tool.
If the risk of explosion at the workplace cannot be eliminated, the following measures must
be implemented:
Avoidance of collisions and dropping of steel elements.
Wearing antistatic shoes, e.g. leather shoes or using shoe grounding strips.
Avoiding rust layers and aluminum coating at impact points. If this is not possible,
eliminating the risk of explosion locally, e.g. with inert gas.
Adequate air supply and waste air disposal.
Removing or enclosing readily flammable substances in the vicinity.
Keeping the workplace and, if applicable, floor moist.
Table 1- 9

Safety Measures
Working area

Safety Measures

Installations with readily flammable gas


and vapor-air mixtures, e.g. hydrogen,
city gas, acetylene and hydrogen
sulphide

Working only allowed after implementation of special safety


measures and with written permission of plant manager.
Only non-sparking tools to be used (tool softer than
workpiece).

Installations with gas and vapor-air


mixtures such as methane, propane,
butane and petrol

Sufficient to use non-sparking tools. Exception: For


materials with rust formation and aluminum coating or
similar, special protective measures required.

Installations with risk of explosion from


readily flammable dust

Remove dust deposits.


Keep working area wet and protect against dust formation.
Normal tools may be used.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

52

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

Note
Working on energized electrical installations and apparatus in hazardous industrial premises
is prohibited. This also includes the disconnection of live control lines for test purposes.
As an exception, work on intrinsically safe circuits is permitted; also, in special cases, work
on other electrical systems where the user has certified in writing that there is no risk of
explosion for the duration of the work at the site.
If necessary, a fire permit must also be obtained.
Grounding and short-circuiting may only be carried out in hazardous industrial premises
when there is no risk of explosion at the point of grounding and short-circuiting.
Use measuring instruments which are approved for the zones to test for no voltages.

1.10.2

Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2

License
SIMATIC S7 Ex modules are permitted for use in zone 2 (category 3G). Note in this case the
specific conditions on the EU special test certificate (see certificates of conformity on
theInternet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)).

1.10.3

Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1

Types of protection
It is basically possible to install a SIMATIC assembly in a hazardous area zone 1. However,
the system installer must implement additional measures in order to protect the modules.
Two types of protection are available:
the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressurized enclosure";
the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressure-resistant, enclosed casing".
The following figure shows a possible configuration for zone 1 in a pressure-resistant,
enclosed casing with a terminal housing that provides an increased level of safety.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

53

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

Figure 1-14

SIMATIC Ex modules in hazardous area

Housing
The selected type of housing is characterized by the fact that it is able to withstand
explosions occurring inside the housing and that an explosive gas/air mixture surrounding
the housing is not ignited. In addition, the surface temperature does not exceed the limit
values of the temperature classes. Cable glands that are protected against transmission of
internal ignition and isolated against the housing wall must be used for routing the supply
leads into the pressure-resistant, enclosed casing.
A housing with "increased safety" is used as a terminal compartment. Special screwed
glands are used for the cable entries.
The housing must be certified by a testing authority to comply with the "Ex d" type of
protection and the relevant design requirements.
Explosion protection of the housing: Ex de II T5 .. T6.

Cables
The cables used must comply with the EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-11 standards for
intrinsically safe circuits or EN 60079-25 for circuits with increased safety.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

54

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas
The cables for the assembly are to be installed in such a way that they are endangered
neither by thermal, mechanical nor chemical load or stress.
Note
If necessary, the cables should be installed in cable conduits.

Terminals
The terminal connectors for the power supply cable and the bus line should always meet the
requirements of the "increased safety" tape of protection. The clamping points of the
intrinsically safe circuits should always be implemented according to the guidelines of
"Intrinsic safety".

Protective device
The assembly is connected to a 24 V DC supply circuit fed by a power supply unit with safe
electrical isolation. The supply circuit must be protected by an appropriate circuit-breaker.
This circuit-breaker is installed outside the Ex zone.

Switch
The switch for enabling the system should comply with the "Ex de II T6" type of protection.
Table 1- 10

Working on systems to type of protection: Ex de [ib] T5 .. T6

Type of protection
of apparatus used
in system

Type of work to be
carried out

Ex ib

Work within

Additional
requirements and
notes

Zone 1

Zone 2

Opening the
housing, Ex i/e
housing only

allowed

allowed

Connecting/discon
necting lines

allowed

allowed

Current, voltage
and resistance
measurement

allowed with
certified apparatus

allowed

Soldering

prohibited

allowed if
soldering
temperature lower
than ignition
temperature

if no other
apparatus is in the
housing

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

55

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

Type of protection
of apparatus used
in system

Type of work to be
carried out

Ex e
Opening the
housing, Ex i/e
housing only

Work within

Zone 1

Zone 2

allowed

allowed

Connecting/discon not allowed unless


in de-energized
necting lines
state
Current, voltage
and resistance
measurement
Soldering

Ex d
Opening the
housing, Ex d
housing only

Additional
requirements and
notes
if no other
apparatus is in the
housing

only in deenergized state


and if no risk of
explosion

voltage
voltage
measurement with measurement with
certified apparatus certified apparatus
only
only
prohibited

allowed in deenergized state if


soldering
temperature lower
than ignition
temperature

Zone 1

Zone 2

prohibited

allowed if no risk
of explosion

Connecting/discon not allowed unless


in de-energized
necting lines
state

apparatus in
pressure-resistant
enclosure are no
longer protected
against explosion
if housing is
opened

allowed if no risk
of explosion

Current, voltage
and resistance
measurement

Work not possible

allowed if no risk
of explosion

Soldering

prohibited

allowed in deenergized state if


soldering
temperature lower
than ignition
temperature

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

56

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

1.11

Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

Replacing equipment
Work on electrical systems or equipment can only be carried out if a "permit" has been
granted. If electrical equipment is replaced, attention must be paid to the correct temperature
class, explosion group, and corresponding (Ex) zone. Certificates of conformity, EU special
test certificates, and design approval must be available.

Maintaining apparatus
Repaired electrical apparatus may only be placed in operation again after testing by a
recognized expert in accordance with paragraph 15 of ElexV, and the test has been certified,
unless explosion protection has not been affected by the repair. If the repair affects
explosion protection, only original spare parts may be used. Improvised repairs which no
longer ensure explosion protection of apparatus are not permitted.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

57

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules


1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

58

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.1

Chapter overview

Overview
The following SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules are described in this chapter:
Digital input SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
Order number: 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0
Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
Order number: 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0
Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
Order number: 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

Notes
You will find information on the relevant safety standards and on other safety regulations in
the Appendix Standards and Licenses (Page 265).
The general technical specifications in the device manual S7-300 Module Specifications, see
Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629).

2.2

Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD000AB0)

2.2.1

Features and technical specifications

Order Number
6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

59

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Features
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR has the following properties:
4 inputs
electrically isolated from the bus
electrically isolated from each other
load voltage 24 V DC
connectable sensors
to DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6
interconnected mechanical contacts (with diagnostic evaluation)
open-circuited mechanical contacts (without diagnostics)
4 short circuit-proof outputs for the encoder power supply (8.2 V)
Operating points:
logic "1" 2.1 mA
logic "0" 1.2 mA
Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs
Fault indications = red LEDs for
group fault indication (SF)
channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)
configurable diagnostics
configurable diagnostic interrupt
configurable process interrupt
Intrinsic safety of the inputs in accordance with EN 60079-11 and EN 61241-11
2-wire encoder connection
Supports time stamping
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

60

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Figure 2-1

Wiring diagram of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

61

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Block diagram SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Figure 2-2

Block diagram of the digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

62

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Technical specifications of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 230 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

yes
They return the process value that
applied before the parameters were
set.

Supports time stamping

yes

Number of inputs

Line length, shielded

max. 200 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1057 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2,
Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 V DC

Rated load voltage L+

24 V DC

Reverse voltage protection

Number of inputs which can be activated simultaneously

yes
4

Electrical isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

yes

between the channels and load voltage L+

yes

between the channels

yes

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

63

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

between the channels and load voltage L+

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

DC 75 V
AC 60 V

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 2500 V DC

Channels to each other

with 2500 V DC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 500 V DC

Current input

from backplane bus

from load voltage L+

Module power loss

max. 80 mA
max. 50 mA
typical 1.1 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status indication

Inputs

green LED per channel

Interrupts

Process interrupt

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable
Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic functions readout

possible

monitoring for

short-circuit

I > 8.5 mA

Wire break

I 0.1 mA

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1057 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of input circuits (per channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

max. 10 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

max. 14.1 mA

P0 (load power)

max. 33.7 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

max. 100 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

max. 3 F

Um (fault voltage)

max. DC 60V
AC 30V

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

max. 60C

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

64

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)
Data for sensor selection
To DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6
Input current

at signal "1"

2.1 to 7 mA

at signal "0"

0.35 to 1.2 mA

Time/frequency
Interrupt conditioning time for

Interrupt conditioning only

max. 250 s

Interrupt and diagnostic conditioning

max. 250 s

Input delay (EV)

Configurable

yes

Nominal value

type 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms

Configuration in RUN (CiR)


If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs.
SF LED is lit:
If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs
(on the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared
and the module is operating properly.
Remedy:
Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the
module, or
Inserting and removing modules

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

65

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

2.2.2

Parameterization

Parameterization
You set the parameters of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR in STEP 7. You must
implement the settings in CPU STOP mode. The parameters set in this way are stored in the
CPU during transfer from PG to S7-300. These parameters are transferred to the digital
module during the status change from STOP-->RUN.
You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55 to 57.
The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into:
static parameters
dynamic parameters
The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.
Table 2- 1

Static and dynamic parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Parameter

can be set with

CPU operating status

static

Programming Devices

STOP

dynamic

Programming Devices

STOP

dynamic

SFCs 55 to 57 in user program

RUN

Default settings
The SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR features default settings for diagnostics, interrupts etc..
These defaults apply to digital input modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7.

Configurable characteristics
The characteristics of the SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR can be parameterized with the following
parameter blocks:
Basic settings
Diagnostics
Process interrupts

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

66

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Channel group allocation


The table shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the channel groups of the SM 321; DI 4 x
NAMUR.
Table 2- 2

Allocation of 4 digital input channels to the 4 channel groups of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Channel

Allocated channel group

Channel 0

Channel group 0

Channel 1

Channel group 1

Channel 2

Channel group 2

Channel 3

Channel group 3

Parameters of the digital input module


The table below provides an overview of the parameters of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and
shows what parameters
are static or dynamic and
can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group.
Table 2- 3

Parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Parameter

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR
Range of
values

Default

Type of

Effective
range

Basic settings

Input delay (ms)

Process interrupt enable

Enable diagnostic interrupt

0.1/0.5/3/15/20 3

static

Module

yes/no

no

dynamic

Module

yes/no

no

dynamic

Module

yes/no

no

static

yes/no

no

static

Channel
group

yes/no

no

dynamic

yes/no

no

dynamic

Diagnostics

Wire-break monitoring

Short-circuit to M

Channel
group

Process interrupts

with leading edge

at trailing edge

Channel
group
Channel
group

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

67

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Input delay
The table below shows the programmable input delay times of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and
their tolerances.
Table 2- 4

Delay times of input signal for SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Input delay

2.2.3

Tolerance

0.1 ms

75 to 150 s

0.5 ms

0.4 to 0.8 ms

3 ms (default)

2.8 to 3.5 ms

15 ms

14.5 to 15.5 ms

20 ms

19 to 21 ms

Diagnostic messages

Introduction
You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal acquisition takes place
without errors.

Parameterizing diagnostics
You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

Diagnostic evaluation
We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic
messages when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as
"wire break" or "short-circuit to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at
the "wire break" or "short-circuit to M" parameters.
Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization.
A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic
interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization.
Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED and
the corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at
POWER ON).
Exception:
The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only
when parameterization is enabled.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

68

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Diagnostics of the digital input module


The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages generated by
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR. You enable the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.
The diagnostics information refers to either the channel groups or the entire module.
Table 2- 5

Diagnostic messages of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR


Diagnostic message

Effective range of diagnostics

Configurable

Channel group

Yes

Module

No

Wire break
Short-circuit to M
incorrect parameters in module
Module not configured
external auxiliary voltage missing
No internal auxiliary voltage
Fuse blown
Time watchdog tripped
EPROM error
RAM error
CPU error
Hardware interrupt lost

Reading out diagnostic messages


You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic
messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53.

Causes of error and remedies


The table below provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures
for individual diagnostic messages.
However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output
the relevant programmable diagnostic messages.
Table 2- 6

Diagnostic messages as well as their causes and remedies in


SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Diagnostic message
Short-circuit to M
(I > 8.5 mA)

Possible fault causes


Short-circuit between the two
encoder lines
with contacts as sensor

Wire break
(I 0.1 m A)

Corrective measures
Eliminate the short-circuit
Connect 1 k resistor directly at

1 k series resistor not fitted in line


to contact

contact in line

Conductor break between module


and NAMUR sensor

Connect line

with contact as sensor (wire break


monitoring enabled)

10 k resistor not fitted or interrupted

directly at contact

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

69

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

Diagnostic message

Possible fault causes


with contact as sensor (without
monitoring)

Corrective measures
disable channel by parameterization
"diagnostics wire break"

Channel not used (open)


Incorrect parameters Invalid parameters loaded in module
in module
by means of SFC

Check parameterization of module and


re-load valid parameters

Module not
configured

Module not supplied with parameters

Include module in parameterization

external auxiliary
voltage missing

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary
voltage

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Fuse blown

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Time watchdog
tripped

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference sources

Module defective

Replace module

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference sources and


switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON

CPU error

Module defective

Replace module

Hardware interrupt
lost

The CPU is unable to process


successive hardware interrupts at
this rate

Change interrupt processing in CPU


and reparameterize module if
necessary

EPROM error
RAM error

2.2.4

Interrupts

Introduction
In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts:
Diagnostic interrupt
Process interrupt

Parameterizing interrupts
You program the interrupts in STEP 7.

Default setting
The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

Diagnostic interrupt
The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such
as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic
functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

70

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)
processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt
module (OB82).

Process interrupt
The module supports triggering of process interrupts for each channel at the positive,
negative or both edges of the signal transition, depending on parameter settings. You can
determine which of the channels has triggered the interrupt from the local data of the OB 40
in the user program.
Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the
CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are
no higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are
processed one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred.

Process interrupt lost


Events (edge transitions) at a channel are written to the process interrupt stack and trigger a
process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the
CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status
triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt
must be enabled.
Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this
channel.

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state


The input values of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR are dependent on the supply voltage and on
the operating status of the CPU.
The table below provides an overview of these dependencies.
Table 2- 7

Dependencies of the input values for CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM
321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Operating status
CPU
POWER ON

RUN
STOP

POWER OFF

Supply voltage L+ at digital


module

Input value of the digital


module

L+ applied

Process value

L+ not applied > 20 ms

0 signal

L+ applied

Process value

No L+

0 signal

L+ applied

No L+

Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR is always indicated by the SFLED on the front of the module and additionally entered in diagnostics.
In the event of the module supply voltage L+ failing, the input value is initially held for 20 to
40 ms before the "0" signal is transferred to the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

71

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)
influence the process value, but are reported by diagnostics interrupt and at the group error
LED.

Interrupt-triggering channels
The relevant process interrupt-triggering channel is logged in the OB40_POINT_ADDR
variable of the start information of OB40. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in
DWORD 8 of local data.
Byte

Variable

Data type

6/7

OB40_MDL_ADDR

WORD

B#16#0

Address of the interrupt-triggering


module

As of 8

OB40_POINT_ADDR

DWORD

see the
following
figure

Indication of the interrupt-triggering


inputs

Figure 2-3

Description

Start Information of OB40: which event has triggered the process interrupt

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

72

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

2.3

Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 3225SD00-0AB0)

2.3.1

Features and technical specifications

Order Number
6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0

Features
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA has the following properties:
4 outputs
electrically isolated from the bus
electrically isolated from each other
suitable for
intrinsically safe valves
acoustic interrupts
indicators
configurable diagnostics
configurable diagnostic interrupt
configurable default output
Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs
Fault indications = red LEDs for
group fault indication (SF)
channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)
Intrinsic safety of the outputs in accordance with EN 60079-11 and EN 61241-11
2-wire actuator connection
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

73

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Block diagram of SM 332; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Figure 2-4

Block diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

74

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Block diagram SM 332; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Figure 2-5

Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

75

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Technical data of SM 332; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA


Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 230 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

yes
specify the output value which
was valid before the
parameterization

Number of outputs

Line length, shielded

max. 200 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1059 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2,
Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 V DC

Rated load voltage L+

24 V DC

Reverse voltage protection

yes

Total current of outputs

horizontal arrangement up to 60 C

no restrictions

vertical installation to 40 C

no restrictions

Electrical isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

yes

between the channels and load voltage L+

yes

between the channels

yes

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

76

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)
Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels and load voltage L+

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

DC 75 V
AC 60 V

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 2500 V DC

Channels to each other

with 2500 V DC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 500 V DC

Current input

from backplane bus

from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Module power loss

Max. 85 mA
max. 160 mA
typical 3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status indication

Outputs

green LED per channel

Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

configurable

Diagnostic functions

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic functions readout

possible

monitoring for

short-circuit

I > 10 mA (10%)

Wire break

I 0.15 mA

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1059 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

max.25.2 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

max. 70 mA

P0 (load power)

max. 440 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

max. 6.7 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

max. 90 nF

Um (fault voltage)

max. DC 60V
AC 30V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

77

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

max. 60C

Data for sensor selection


Outputs

No-load voltage UA0

Internal resistance RI

DC 24 V 5%
390 5%

Curve vertices E

Voltage UE

Current IE

DC 19 V 10%
10 mA 10%

Parallel wiring of two outputs

for redundant activation of a load

not possible

for increasing power

possible

Switching frequency

at resistive load

100 Hz

at inductive load (LLo)

100 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output

Response threshold

yes, electronic
Curve vertex E

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

78

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Block diagram

Generator

Ri

Internal resistor

RL

Line resistor

RA

Load resistor

UAO

No-load voltage

UA

Output voltage

URL

Voltage drop at load resistor

URA

Output power at load

U0

max. output voltage

I0

max. output voltage

IRA

Load current

Output characteristic

Curve vertice (UE, IE)


UE = 19V 10%
IE = 10 mA 10%
Output current electronically clocked at overload.
Clock ratio 1:25

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

79

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)

2.3.2

Parameterization

Parameterization
You program the parameters in STEP 7. You must implement the settings in CPU STOP
mode. During transfer from the PG to the S7-300, the parameters set in this way are stored
in the CPU and then transferred by the CPU to the digital module.
Alternatively, you can also change several parameters in the user program with SFCs 55 to
57 (see STEP 7-online help).
The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into:
static parameters
dynamic parameters
The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.
Table 2- 8

Static and dynamic parameters


Parameter

can be set with

CPU operating status

static

Programming Devices

STOP

dynamic

Programming Devices

STOP

SFCs 55 to 57 in user program

RUN

Default settings
The digital output features default settings for diagnostics, substitute values, etc..
These defaults apply to digital modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

80

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Configurable characteristics
The characteristics of the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA can be parameterized with the
following parameter blocks:
Basic settings
Diagnostics

Channel groups allocation


The table below shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the 4 channel groups of digital
output.
Table 2- 9

Assignment of the four channels to the four channel groups of


SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA
Channel

Allocated channel group

Channel 0

Channel group 0

Channel 1

Channel group 1

Channel 2

Channel group 2

Channel 3

Channel group 3

Parameters of the digital output module


The table below provides an overview of the parameters and shows what parameters:
are static or dynamic,
can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group.
Table 2- 10

Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA


Parameter

SM 322; DO 4 x DC 24V/10 mA / or 15V/20 mA


Range of
values

Default

Type of

Effective
range

Basic settings

Enable diagnostic interrupt

retain last valid value

Switch to substitute value

Substitute value

yes/no

no

dynamic

module

yes/no

no

dynamic

Module

yes/no

yes

dynamic

Module

0/1

dynamic

Module

Channel
group

Diagnostics

Short-circuit to M

Wire break monitoring

Supply voltage fault

yes/no

no

static

yes/no

no

static

yes/no

no

static

Channel
group
Channel
group

1 If

wire break diagnostic enable is not parameterized there will be no indication by the channel fault
LED in the event of a wire break.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

81

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

2.3.3

Diagnostic messages

Introduction
You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal output takes place without
errors.

Parameterizing diagnostics
You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

Diagnostic evaluation
We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic
messages when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as
"short-circuit to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at the "wire
break" or "short-circuit to M" parameters.
Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization.
A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic
interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization.
Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED or the
corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at
POWER ON).
Exception:
The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only
when parameterization is enabled.

Diagnostics of digital output module


The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages. You enable the
diagnostics functions in STEP 7.
The diagnostic information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

82

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)
Table 2- 11

Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA


Diagnostic message

Effective range of diagnostics

Configurable

Channel group

Yes

Module

No

Short-circuit to M
Wire break
No-load voltage
Module not configured
external auxiliary voltage missing
No internal auxiliary voltage
Fuse blown
Time watchdog tripped
EPROM error
RAM error
CPU error

Wire break detection


A wire break is detected at a current 0.15 mA.

Reading out diagnostic messages


You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic
messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53.

Causes of error and remedies


The table below provides a list of possible causes, marginal conditions for fault recognition
and corresponding corrective measures for individual diagnostic messages.
However, be aware that error detection must be programmed accordingly at the modules in
order to output programmable diagnostic messages.
Table 2- 12

Diagnostic messages as well as their causes of error and remedies for the
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Diagnostic message
Short-circuit to M

Wire break

No-load voltage

Fault
recognition at

Possible fault causes

Corrective measures

only when
output at "1"

output overload

Eliminate overload

Short-circuit between the two


output lines

Eliminate the short-circuit

only when
output at "1"

Break in line between module Connect line


and actuator

only when
output at "1"

Channel not used (open)

disable channel by
parameterization "diagnostics
wire break"

Failure of internal channel


supply voltage

Replace module

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

83

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

Diagnostic message
Incorrect parameters
in module

Possible fault causes

Corrective measures

general

Invalid parameters loaded in


module by means of SFC

Check parameterization of
module and re-load valid
parameters

Module not configured general

Invalid parameters loaded in


module by means of SFC

Check parameterization of
module and re-load valid
parameters

external auxiliary
voltage missing

general

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary
voltage

general

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse
defective

Replace module

Fuse blown

general

module-internal fuse
defective

Replace module

Time watchdog
tripped

general

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference
sources and switch CPU
supply voltage OFF/ON

Module defective

Replace module

EPROM error
CPU error

2.3.4

Fault
recognition at

Interrupts

Introduction
The digital output can trigger a diagnostic interrupt.

Parameterizing interrupts
Interrupts can be configured in STEP 7.

Default setting
The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

Diagnostic interrupt
The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such
as short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic functions inhibited
by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts processing of the user
program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82).

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state


The output values are dependent on the supply voltages and CPU operating status.
The table below provides an overview of these dependencies.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

84

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)
Table 2- 13

Dependencies of output values on the CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Operating status
CPU
POWER ON

RUN
STOP

POWER OFF

Supply voltage L+ at digital


module

Output value of the digital


module

L+ applied

CPU value

No L+

0 signal

L+ applied

Substitute value / last value


Substitute value for 0-signal is
default setting

No L+

0 signal

L+ applied

0 signal

No L+

0 signal

Failure of the supply voltage is always indicated by the SF LED on the front of the module
and additionally entered in diagnostics.

2.4

Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES73225RD00-0AB0)

2.4.1

Features and technical specifications

Order Number
6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

Features
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA has the following properties:
4 outputs
electrically isolated from the bus
electrically isolated from each other
suitable for
intrinsically safe valves
acoustic interrupts
indicators
configurable diagnostics
configurable diagnostic interrupt
configurable default output

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

85

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)
Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs
Fault indications = red LEDs for
group fault indication (SF)
channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)
Intrinsic safety of the outputs in accordance with EN 60079-11 and EN 61241-11
2-wire actuator connection
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Figure 2-6

Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

86

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

Block diagram of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Figure 2-7

Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

87

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA


Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 230 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

yes
return the output value which
was valid before the
parameterization

Number of outputs

Line length, shielded

max. 200 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1056 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2,
Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

1. 5 V DC

Rated load voltage L+

2. 24 V DC
yes

Reverse voltage protection

Total current of outputs

horizontal arrangement up to 60 C

no restrictions

vertical installation to 40 C

no restrictions

Electrical isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

yes

between the channels and load voltage L+

yes

between the channels

yes

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

88

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)
Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels and load voltage L+

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

DC 75 V
AC 60 V

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 2500 V DC

Channels to each other

with 2500 V DC

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 500 V DC

Current input

from backplane bus

from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Module power loss

Max. 85 mA
max. 160 mA
typical 3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics


Status indication

Outputs

green LED per channel

Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic functions readout

possible

monitoring for

short-circuit

I > 20.5 mA (10%)

Wire break

I 0.15 mA

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1056 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

max.15.75 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

max. 85 mA

P0 (load power)

max. 335 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

max. 5 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

max. 478 nF

Um (fault voltage)

max. 60 VDC
30 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

89

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

max. 60C

Data for sensor selection


Outputs

No-load voltage UA0

Internal resistance RI

DC 15 V 5%
200 5%

Curve vertices E

Voltage UE

Current IE

DC 10 V 10%
20.5 mA 10%

Parallel wiring of two outputs

for redundant activation of a load

not possible

for increasing power

possible

Switching frequency

at resistive load

100 Hz

at inductive load (L < Lo)

100 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output

Response threshold

yes, electronic
Curve vertex E

Block diagram

Generator

Ri

Internal resistance

RL

Line resistor

RA

Load resistor

UAO

No-load voltage

UA

Output voltage

URL

Voltage drop at load resistor

URA

Output power at load

U0

max. output voltage

I0

max. output voltage

IRA

Load current

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

90

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules
Output characteristic

Curve vertice (UE, IE)


UE = 10 V 10%
IE = 20.5 mA 10%
Output current electronically clocked at overload.
Clock ratio 1:25

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

91

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

2.5

Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records


The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1.
Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the
module.
Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus
additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the
module.

Byte 0 to 3 (data records 0 and 1)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

92

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1)


Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics
information and the length of the channels.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

93

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules


2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

94

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1

Analog value representation

3.1.1

Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values

Conversion of analog values


The CPU processes the analog values only in binary form.
Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation


The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values with the same rated
range.
The analog values are represented as two's complement.
Table 3- 1

Characteristics of Analog Modules

Resolution

Analog value

Bit number

15

Bit significance

sig 214 213 212 211 210 29


n

14

13

12

11

10

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

sign
The sign of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
"0" +
"1" -

3.1.2

General information about the display of analog values within the measuring
ranges of analog inputs

Introduction
This section contains the tables of digitized analog values for the measurement ranges of
analog modules
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

95

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

Reading measured value tables


The tables represent the digitized analog values of the various measurement ranges of
analog input modules.
As the binary notation of analog values is always the same, these tables only contain a
comparison of measuring ranges with the units.

Measured value resolution


Deviating from this, a Sigma Delta AD converter is used with the analog input modules
described in the manual. Irrespective of the configurable integration time, this converter
always makes available the maximum representable 15 Bit +sign. Lower resolution ratings
than indicated in the specifications are due to conversion noise based on the shorter
integration times (2.5, 16/2/3, 20 ms). The different integration times do not influence the
numeric notation of measured values. The number of stable bits is specified in the technical
specifications.
The number of stable bits is the resolution at which, despite noise, the "no missing
code"characteristics of the AD converter are guaranteed.
The bits that are no longer stable at shorter integration times are marked with "x" in the
following tables.
Table 3- 2

Representation of the smallest stable unit of the analog value

Stable bits (+
sign)

Smallest stable unit

Analog value

decimal

hexadecimal

High-Byte

Low-Byte

64

40H

Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

01xxxxxx

10

32

20H

Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

001xxxxx

12

8H

Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

00001xxx

13

4H

Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

000001xx

15

1H

Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

00000001

Noise-prone bits
At a constant input voltage, noise causes distribution of the supplied value by more than 1
digit. In the majority of cases, these "unsteady" values can be used as they are. In any case,
this is the most effective option when subsequent processing has integral action
characteristics (integrator, controller, etc.) in any form whatsoever. If this "unsteady state" is
undesirable (e.g. for displays), you can
mask out the "x" bits
round up to "stable" bits
filter the successive values
When choosing these options, you first have to scan the values in order to prevent any
change or filtering of the coding of invalid measured values (-32768 / 8000H and
32767 / 7FFFH).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

96

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.3

Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges

Voltage measuring ranges 25 mV, 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV and 1 V.
Table 3- 3

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (voltage measuring
range)
Measuring ranges

Units
1V

decimal

Location

25 mV

50 mV

80 mV

250
mV

500
mV

hexadecimal

> 29.397

> 58.794

> 94.071

>293.96

>587.94

> 1.1750

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

29.397

58.794

94.071

293.96

587.94

1.1750

32511

7EFFH

Overrange

25.001

50.002

80.003

250.02

500.02

1.0001

27649

6C01H

25.000

50.000

80.000

250.00

500.00

1.0000

27648

6C00H

18.750

37.500

60.000

187.50

375.00

0.7500

20736

5100H

- 18.750

- 37.500

- 60.000

- 187.50

- 375.00

0.7500

-20736

AF00H

- 25.000

- 50.000

- 80.000

- 250.00

- 500.00

- 1.0000

-27648

9400H

- 25.001

- 50.002

- 80.003

- 250.01

- 500.02

- 1.0001

-27649

93FFH

- 29.398

- 58.796

- 94.074

- 293.98

- 587.96

- 1.1750

-32512

8100H

<29.398

<- 58.796 <- 94.074 <- 293.98 <- 587.96 <- 1.1750 -32768

8000H

Rated
range

Underrange
Underflow

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

97

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.4

Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges

0 mA to 20 mA and 4 mA to 20 mA current measuring ranges


Table 3- 4

Displaying the digitized measured values SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4.... .20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ...
.20mA HART analog input modules

Measuring
range

Measuring
range

Units

from

from

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

> 23.515

>22.810

32767

7FFFH

23.515

22.810

32511

7EFFH

Decimal

Location
Hexadecimal

20.0007

20.0005

27649

6C01H

20.000

20.000

27648

6C00H

14.998

16.000

20736

5100H

4.000

0H

0.0
<0.0

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

3.9995

-1

FFFFH

3.800

-345

FEA7H

3.600

-691

FD4DH

Wire break limit I 3.60 mA in accordance


with NAMUR 1

Underrange

1.1852

-4864

ED00H

<1.1852

32767

7FFFH

03

58624

E500H

Underflow

NAMUR limits are evaluated only if wire break diagnostics is enabled. When wire break diagnostics
is enabled, 7FFFH is output if the current value drops below 3.6 mA. If the value increases again to
above 3.8 mA, the wire break signal is canceled and the current value is output again.

2 Negative

measured values cannot be acquired. For analog values < 0 mA each display of the digital
measured value of 0 mA remains.

3 If

wire break monitoring is not enabled, the measured value can fall to 0 mA and the module returns
E500H.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

98

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.5

Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders

Resistance sensor with measurement ranges 150 , 300 and 600


Table 3- 5

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (resistance sensor)

Measuring
range
150

Measuring
range
300

Measuring
range
600

> 176.383

> 352.767

176.383
:

Units

Location

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 705.534

32767

7FFFH

352.767

705.534

32511

7EFFH

150.005

300.011

600.022

27649

6C01H

150.000

300.000

600.000

27648

6C00H

112.500

225.000

450.000

20736

5100H

0.000

0.000

0.000

0H

Overflow
Overrange 1

Rated range

(negative values physically not possible)


1 The

3.1.6

same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange.

Analog value representation for the standard temperature range

Standard temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751
Table 3- 6

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
standard; Pt 100, Pt200)

Temperature range
standard 850 C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1300.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

1300.0

13000

32C8H

850.1

8501

2135H

850.0

8500

2134H

-200.0

-2000

F830H

-200.1

-2001

F82FH

-240.0

-2400

F6A0H

Pt 100, Pt 200
in C

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange2

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

99

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

Temperature range
standard 850 C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

-32768

8000H

Underflow

Pt 100, Pt 200
in C
< -240.0

The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The overrange has
been extended to 1300C in order to be able to incorporate future technical developments of platinum
thermal resistors (thermistors). It is not possible to specify the accuracy of this range.
1

The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the
characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of this range.
2

3.1.7

Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100

Standard temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760


Table 3- 7

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
standard; Ni 100)

Temperature range
standard

decimal

hex

Location

> 295.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

295.0

2950

686H

250.1

2501

9C5H

250.0

2500

9C4H

Ni 100
in C

-60.0

-600

FDA8H

-60.1

-601

FDA7H

-105.0

-1050

FF97H

< - 105.0

-32768

8000H

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1
Underflow

1 The

characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify
the accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

100

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.8

Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range

Climatic temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751
Table 3- 8

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
climatic; Pt 100, Pt200)

Climatic temperature
range

decimal

hex

Location

> 325.12

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

325.12

32512

7F00H

276.49

27649

6C01H

276.48

27648

6C00H

-200.00

-20000

B1E0

-200.01

-20001

B1E1

-240.00

-24000

A240H

< - 240.00

-32768

8000H

Pt 100, Pt 200
in C

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange2
Underflow

The same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange Pt 100, Pt 200
climatic.

2 The

characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the
characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

101

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.9

Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100

Climatic temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760


The same value range as in the standard range of the Ni 100 sensor applies in the climatic
range Ni 100 only with a higher resolution of 0.01C instead of 0.1C.
Table 3- 9

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range
climatic Ni 100)

Climatic temperature
range

decimal

hex

Location

> 295.00

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

295.00

29500

733CH

250.01

25001

61A9H

250.00

25000

61A8H

Ni 100
in C

-60.00

-6000

E890H

-60.01

-6001

E88FH

-105.00

-10500

D6FCH

< - 105.00

-32768

8000H

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1
Underflow

1 The

characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify
the accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

102

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.10

Analog value representation for the temperature range type B

Temperature range sensor type B


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 10

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type B)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 2070.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

2070.0

20700

50DCH

1820.1

18201

4719H

1820.0

18200

4718H

Type B

200.01

2000

7D0H

0.0

0H

-0.1

-1

FFFFH

-150.0

-1500

FF24H

< -150.0

-32768

8000H

Overrange 2

Rated range

Underrange2
Underflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below FA24H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

module linearizes the range +1820 C to +200C for type B. The gradient of the curve
deteriorates below +200C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the
characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.
The characteristic curve of the type B thermocouple does not feature monotone characteristics in the
temperature range between 0 and 40C. Values measured in this range cannot be allocated to a
specific temperature.
2 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

103

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.11

Analog value representation for the temperature range type E

Temperature range sensor type E


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 11

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type E)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1200.0
1200.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

12000

2EE0H

1000.1

10001

2711H

1000.0

10000

2710H

-150.01

-1500

FA24H

-270.0

-2700

F574H

-270.1

-2701

F573H

Overrange 2

Rated range

Underrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

module will linearize the range +1000 C to -150 C for type E. The gradient of the curve
deteriorates below -150 C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the
characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.
2

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

104

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.12

Analog value representation for the temperature range type J

Temperature range sensor type J


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 12

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type J)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1360.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

1360.0

13600

3520H

1200.1

12001

2EE1H

1200.0

12000

2EE0H

-210.0

-2100

F7CCH

-210.1

-2101

F7CBH

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F31CH the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify
the accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.13

Analog value representation for the temperature range type K

Temperature range sensor type K


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 13

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type K)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1622.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

1622.0

16220

3F5CH

1372.1

13721

3599H

Overrange 2

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

105

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

1372.0

13720

3598H

-220.01

-2200

F768H

-270.0

-2700

F574H

-270.1

-2701

F573H

location

Rated range

Underrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

module linearizes the range +1372 C to -220C for type K. The gradient of the curve
deteriorates below -220C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the
characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.14

Analog value representation for the temperature range type L

Temperature range sensor type L


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 14

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type L)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location
Overflow

> 1150.0

32767

7FFFH

1150.0

13500

2CECH

900.1

9001

2329H

900.0

9000

2328H

-200.0

-2000

F830H

-200.1

-2001

F82FH

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify
the accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

106

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.15

Analog value representation for the temperature range type N

Temperature range sensor type N


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 15

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type N)

Temperature range
inC

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1550.0
1550.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

15500

3C8CH

1300.1

13001

32C9H

1300.0

13000

32C8H

-220.01

-2200

F768H

-270.0

-2700

F574H

-270.1

-2701

F573H

Overrange 2

Rated range

Underrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

module linearizes the range +1300 C to -220C for type N. The gradient of the curve
deteriorates below -220C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the
characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.
2 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

107

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.16

Analog value representation for the temperature range type R

Temperature range sensor type R


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 16

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type R)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 2019.0
2019.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

20190

4EDEH

1769.1

17691

451BH

1769.0

17690

451AH

-50.0

-500

FE0CH

-50.1

-501

FE0BH

-170.0

-1700

F95CH

< -170.0

-32768

8000H

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1
Underflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify
the accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

108

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.17

Analog value representation for the temperature range type S

Temperature range sensor type S


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 17

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type S)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 1850.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

1850.0

18500

4844H

1769.1

17691

451BH

1769.0

17690

451AH

-50.0

-500

FE0CH

-50.1

-501

FE0BH

-170.0

-1700

F95CH

< -170.0

-32768

8000H

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1
Underflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

109

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.18

Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T

Temperature range sensor type T


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 18

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type T)

Temperature range
in C

decimal

hex

Location

> 540.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

540.0

5400

1518H

400.1

4001

0FA1H

400.0

4000

0FA0H

-230.0 1)

-2300

F704H

-270.0

-2700

F574H

-270.1

-2701

F573H

Overrange 2

Rated range

Underrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
1 The

module will linearize the range +400 C to -230C for type T. The gradient of the curve
deteriorates below -230C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the
characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The

characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

110

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.19

Analog value representation for the temperature range type U

Temperature range sensor type U


The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.
Table 3- 19

Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,
type U)

Temperature range
inC

decimal

hexadecimal

location

> 850.0

32767

7FFFH

Overflow

850.0

8500

2134H

600.1

6001

0FA1H

600.0

6000

0FA0H

-200.0

-2000

F830H

-200.1

-2001

F82FH

Overrange 1

Rated range

Underrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative
range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module
signals underflow and outputs 8000H.
The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of
the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the
accuracy of these ranges.
1

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

111

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.20

Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs

Current output ranges from 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA


Table 3- 20

Representation of analog output range of analog output modules (current output ranges)

Output
range

Output
range

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Units

Location

decimal

hex

0.0

0.0

32512

7F00H

23.515

22.81

32511

7EFFH

20.0007

20.005

27649

6C01H

20.000

20.000

27648

6C00H

0.0

4.000

0H

0.0

3.9995

-1

FFFFH

0.0

- 6912

E500H

0.0

- 6913

E4FFH

- 32768

8000H

Overflow
Overrange

Rated range

Underrange

Underflow

Note
For the analog output SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20mA the linearity can be reduced in the
overrange for load impedances > 425 .

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

112

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.2 General information on wiring technology

3.2

General information on wiring technology

Abbreviations used
The diagrams in the next section show the various options of wiring encoders. The
abbreviations used in the diagrams have the following meanings:
Abbreviation

Meaning

IC+

Positive terminal of the constant current output

IC-

Negative terminal of the constant current output

M+

Positive measuring line

M-

Negative measuring line

UISO

Potential difference between the inputs and grounding terminal M

UCM

Potential difference between the inputs

L+

24 VDC power supply terminal

24 VDC power supply ground terminal

P5V

Supply voltage of module logic

Minternal

Module logic ground

UV

Electrically isolated supply voltage of the compensating box

L0+ to L3+

Electrically isolated transducer supply per channel

UM

Measurement voltage

RS

Measuring resistor

UV+; UV-

External supply voltage of the transducer

QI0- to QI3-

Analog outputs current (output current)

M0- to M3-

Reference potentials of the analog output circuit

RL

Resistance of the load/actuator

UISO

Potential difference between the reference potential of channels M0- to


M3-, or between the channels and the M terminal of the CPU

See also
Wiring transducers to analog inputs (Page 114)
Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (Page 116)
Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors (Page 121)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

113

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs

3.3

Wiring transducers to analog inputs

Transducers
The analog input modules support the connection of different transducers to suit a specific
type of measurement:
Voltage sensor
Current sensor as
2-wire transducer
4-wire transducer
Resistance sensor

Lines for analog signals


Shielded conductors twisted in pairs are used for the analog signals.

Electrically isolated analog input modules


A galvanic connection of measuring circuit ground M- to CPU ground M does not exist on
electrically isolated analog input modules.
Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference
VISO developing between reference ground M- of the measuring circuit and CPU ground M.
Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted potential difference
VISO. Interconnect the reference potential M- of the measuring circuit with reference potential
M of the CPU if the permitted value of VISO is actually exceeded or if you cannot precisely
determine the potential difference. This also refers to unused inputs.

Electrical isolation between channels


The channels are electrically isolated by means of separate power transformers, and the
signals are transferred via optocoupler. This electrical isolation tolerates high potential
differences between the channels. In addition, very good values are achieved with regard to
interference voltage rejection and crosstalk between the channels.
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA features electrically isolated channels.
To facilitate channel isolation, The SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD is equipped with optical
semiconductor multiplexers that ensure a high common-mode range of UCM DC 60 V. This
represents a virtually equivalent solution in practical applications.
Higher potential differences can be tolerated if the modules are used to process signals from
the non-Ex area.

Insulated transducers
Insulated transducers are not wired to local ground potential. These transducers can be
operated in electrically isolated mode. Potential differences VCM (static or dynamic) may
develop between the input channels as a result of local conditions or interference. However,
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

114

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs
such potential differences may not exceed the permitted value of VCM. If there is a possibility
that the permissible value may be exceeded, the M- terminals of the input channels must be
interconnected.
Interconnect M- of the input channels and M of the CPU if you expect any violation of VISO
limits (inputs to the backplane bus).
The diagram below shows the basic wiring of insulated transducers to an electrically isolated
analog input module.

Figure 3-1

Insulated transducers
Logic
Backplane bus
Ground bus
Connection of insulated transducers to an isolated analog input module

Non-insulated transducers
Non-insulated transducers are wired to local ground potential. Potential differences VCM
(static or dynamic) may develop between locally distributed measuring points as a result of
local conditions or interference. Install equipotential conductors between the measuring
points in order to avoid such potential differences.
The diagram below shows the basic wiring of non-insulated transducers to an electrically
isolated analog input module.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

115

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Non-insulated transducers

Logic

Backplane bus

Ground bus

Equipotential conductor

Figure 3-2

Connection of non-insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module

See also
Shielding (Page 39)
Using thermocouples (Page 122)

3.4

Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4


x RTD

Options of wiring thermocouples


The diagrams below show the various options of wiring thermocouples with external or
internal compensation. The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant
chapters also apply to these circuits.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

116

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Thermocouples with compensation box


All thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of a module and which have the same
reference junction compensate as follows. The thermocouples which use a compensation
box must be of the same type. Each of the thermocouples can be grounded at any arbitrary
point.

Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Reference junction

Supply conductor (copper)

Logic

Backplane bus

Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 C

Thermocouple

Figure 3-3

Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation box to the electrically isolated


analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Thermocouples with direct looping-in of compensation box


The compensation box can be directly interconnected with the measuring circuit if the wiring
of all thermocouples is electrically isolated.
Compensation channel CH 7 is thus not required and is now available as additional
measuring input.
The "Thermocouples with linearization and 0C compensation" type of measurement must
be set for all channels. In doing so, the thermocouples that use a compensation box must be
of the same type.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

117

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Reference junction

Supply conductor (copper)

Logic

Backplane bus

Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 C

Thermocouple

Figure 3-4

Wiring of electrically isolated thermocouples to a compensation box and "0 C


compensation" measurement type with analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Advantages
When using a compensation box with a reference junction temperature of 0 C, the
voltage corresponding to the reference junction temperature is subtracted directly.
Channel 7 can be used as additional measuring channel in this circuit variant.
The number of connecting cables between the compensation box and the analog input
module is reduced.
The faults, which are attributed to isolated compensation measurement do not occur.

Conditions
The thermocouples that are routed to the same compensation box must only be grounded
once at one point.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

118

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Thermocouples with temperature compensation at the terminals


All eight inputs of the measuring channels are available if the thermocouples are wired via a
reference junction regulated to 0 C or 50 C.

Supply conductor (copper)

Logic

Backplane bus

Reference junction regulated to 0 C or 50 C

Figure 3-5

Wiring of thermocouples to analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD via a


reference junction regulated to 0C or 50C

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

119

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Thermocouples with thermal resistor compensation


In this type of compensation, the terminal temperature of the reference junction is
determined by a thermal resistance-type sensor in the climatic range.

Thermocouple

Supply conductor (copper)

Logic

S7-300 backplane bus

Reference junction e.g. Pt100

Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Figure 3-6

Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation by means of thermal resistancetype sensors (Pt100, for example)

Note
The two last channels (channel 6 and 7) of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x
RTD are used for temperature compensation by means of a thermal resistor.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

120

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors

Thermocouples with internal compensation


The internal terminal temperature sensor must be used where thermocouples are wired
directly or via compensating lines to the module. Each channel group can use one of the
supported types of thermocouple independent of the other channel groups.

Figure 3-7

3.5

Wiring of thermocouples with internal compensation to an electrically isolated analog


input module

Thermocouple

Logic

Backplane bus

Internal recording of terminal temperature

Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance


sensors

Measurement
The values of resistance thermometers and resistance transducers are measured using the
4-wire technique. The resistance thermometers/resistance sensors are fed a constant
current via terminals IC + and IC. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometers /
transducers is measured at the M+ and M- terminals. This method returns a high accuracy of
measurement results with 4-wire technology.

Lines for analog signals


Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference
influence.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

121

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.6 Using thermocouples
When using the 4-wire technique to connect resistance thermometers, wire the constant
current line Ic+ and sense line M+ using one of the twisted pairs, and the second pair for Ic+ /
M+. You will achieve a further improvement if you also twist these two twisted-pair wires with
each other (star-quad).
The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant chapters also apply to these
circuits.

Logic

Backplane bus

Figure 3-8

Wiring of resistance thermometers to the electrically isolated analog input module SM


331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

For 2- and 3-wire connections you need to insert corresponding bridges between the module
terminals M+ and IC + or M- and IC - . However, certain losses of measurement accuracy must
be expected when using such connections, because you cannot measure the voltage loss at
the relevant feed lines.

3.6

Using thermocouples

Installation of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of
the pair of thermal elements (sensors) and
of the mounting and terminal elements required.
The thermocouple consists of two wire elements made of different metals or metal alloys
which are joint at their ends by soldering or welding. The different material compounds return
different thermocouple types such as K, J or N. The principle of measurement is the same
for all thermocouple types.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

122

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.6 Using thermocouples

Measuring point

Thermocouple with positive and negative thermal elements

Terminal

Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Reference junction

Copper conductor

Thermal e.m.f. acquisition point

Figure 3-9

Measuring circuit with thermocouple

Operating principle of thermocouples


A difference of the temperature between the measuring point and the free ends of the
thermocouple (terminal) generates a voltage at these electrodes, namely the thermal
voltage.
The value of this thermal voltage is determined by the temperature difference between the
measuring point and the electrodes, and by the material combination of the pair of thermal
elements. As the pair of thermal elements always records a temperature difference, the free
ends of the thermocouple always have to be kept at a known temperature in order to
determine the temperature at a measuring point.

Extension to a reference junction


The pair of thermal elements can be extended using compensating lines in order to
interconnect these with a reference which has a known temperature.
The material of the equalizing conductors has the same thermal e.m.f. as the wires of the
thermocouple. The conductors leading from the reference junction up to the analog module
are made of copper.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

123

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.6 Using thermocouples

Using thermostatically controlled terminal boxes


It is possible to use temperature-compensated terminal boxes. Use boxes with reference
junction temperatures of 0 C or 50 C when using thermostatically controlled terminal
boxes.

Compensation of thermocouples
External or internal compensation can be adopted depending on where (locally) you require
the reference junction.
In the case of external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction for
thermocouples is taken into consideration by means of a compensation box or thermal
resistor.
In the case of internal compensation, the internal terminal temperature of the module is used
for the comparison.

External compensation
The temperature of the reference junction can be compensated by means of a compensating
circuit, e.g. by a compensation box.
The compensation box contains a bridge circuit which is calibrated for a certain reference
junction temperature (compensating temperature). The terminal connections for the ends of
the equalizing conductor of the thermocouple form the reference junction.
If the actual reference temperature deviates from the compensating temperature the
temperature-dependent bridge resistance will change. A positive or negative compensation
voltage is produced which is added to the thermal e.m.f.
Compensation boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C must be used for the
purpose of compensating the analog input modules.
A further external compensation option is to record the reference junction temperature with a
thermal resistor in the climatic range (e.g. Pt 100).
The following conditions must be observed:
External compensation by means of a compensation box can only be carried out for one
specific type of thermocouple. This means that all channels of this module operating with
external compensation must be parameterized for the same type of thermocouple.
Module diagnostic signals "incorrect parameters in module" and "reference channel error"
for the corresponding channels (0..5) in the case of incorrect parameterization.
The parameters of a channel group apply to both channels of this channel group (e.g.
type of thermocouple, integration time, etc.)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

124

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.7 Connecting voltage sensors

Internal compensation
For the purposes of internal compensation, you can form the reference junction at the
terminals of the analog input module. In this case, you must route the compensating
conductors to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor senses the terminal
temperature of the module. The thermocouples (also different types) connected to the
module are compensated with this temperature.
Note
For the analog input module SM 331; SI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, the compensation box is connected
to terminals 18 and 19. The thermal resistor is connected to terminals 16, 17, 18 and 19 in
order to register the reference junction temperature.

3.7

Connecting voltage sensors

Wiring voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Logic

Backplane bus

Figure 3-10

Wiring of voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x
TC/4 x RTD

The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog
inputs" also apply to these circuits.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

125

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

3.8

Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog


inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Wiring current transducers as 2-wire and 4-wire transducer


The next section describes the operation of transducers on analog input module SM 331; AI
4 x 0/4...20 mA.
The relevant analog channel supplies the electrically isolated and short circuit-proof
transducer voltage L0+ to L3+ to the 2-wire transducer. The 2-wire transducer converts the
input process variable into a current from 4 mA to 20 mA.
4-wire transducers feature a separate power supply which must be taken from an external
PS module.
The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog
inputs" also apply to these circuits.

Transducer power supply

Logic

Backplane bus

e.g. pressure, temperature

Figure 3-11

Wiring 2-wire transducers to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA
HART analog input modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

126

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Transducer power supply

Logic

Backplane bus

e.g. pressure, temperature

Figure 3-12

3.9

Wiring 4-wire transducers with external power supply to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA
and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART analog input modules

Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332;


AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Introduction
The analog output modules can be used to supply loads/actuators with current.

Lines for analog signals


Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference
influence.
You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends. Any potential difference
between the cable ends may cause an equipotential current which interferes with the analog
signals. In this case, the shield should only be grounded at one end of the line.

Electrically isolated analog output modules


Electrically isolated analog input modules do not have a galvanic connection between their
reference ground M0- to M3- and CPU reference ground M.
Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference
d UISO developing between reference ground M0- to M3- of the analog circuit and reference
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

127

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules
ground M of the CPU. Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted
potential difference VISO. You should always interconnect the terminals M0- to M3- with the M
terminal of the CPU if you expect any overshoot of permitted limits.

Wiring loads to a current output


You must connect loads to an output current at, e.g., QI0 and the reference point M0- of the
analog circuit.

Backplane bus

Logic

Ground bus

Figure 3-13

Connection of loads to a current output of the electrically isolated analog output module
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

3.10

Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

3.10.1

Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels

Conversion time
The conversion time is made up of the basic conversion time and additional processing
times for wire break monitoring.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

128

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method (integral action,
successive approximation or sigma-delta method) of the analog input channel. In the case of
integral action conversion, the integration time is included directly in the conversion time.
The integration time influences the resolution. The integration times of the individual analog
modules are specified in the respective chapter. You set up the conversion functions in
STEP 7.

Cycle time
Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of digitized measured values to memory or to
the S7-300 backplane bus is handled sequentially, i.e. the analog input channels are
converted successively. The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog input value has
been converted again, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input
channels of the analog input module. The conversion time is based on channel groups when
the analog input channels are combined in channel groups by means of parameterization. In
the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are combined
to form one channel group. You must therefore subdivide the cycle time into steps of 2. You
should disable all unused analog input channels in your STEP 7 program in order to reduce
cycle times.
The diagram shows an overview of how the cycle time is made up for an n-channel analog
input module.

Figure 3-14

3.10.2

Cycle time of an analog input module

Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output


Channels

Conversion time
The conversion time of analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output
values and digital/analog conversion.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

129

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Cycle time
In the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, conversion of the analog output channels takes place in
parallel, i.e. on receipt of the data, all four analog output channels are converted
simultaneously.
The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog output value is re-converted, is constant
and equals the conversion time.

Transient recovery time


The transient recovery time (t2 to t3), i.e. the time from applying the converted value up to
achieving the specified value at the analog output is dependent on load. In this context we
have to distinguish between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads.

Response time
In the most unfavorable case, the response time (t1 to t3), i.e. the time from receiving the
digital output values in the module up to obtaining the specified value at the analog output is
the sum of the cycle time and transient recovery time. The most unfavorable case is when
channel conversion begins just before transfer of a new output value.
The digitized output values are connected simultaneously to all output channels.

tA

Response time

tZ

Cycle time

tE

Transient recovery time

t1

New digitized output value applied

t2

Output value accepted and converted

t3

Specified output value obtained

Figure 3-15

3.10.3

Response time of the analog input channels

Parameters of Analog Modules

Parameterization
You program the parameters of analog modules in STEP 7. These settings must then be
transferred in STOP mode to the CPU. During the status change from STOP-->RUN, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

130

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules
You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55. You can find out
which parameters can be changed in this way in Appendix A of the S7-300, Modules Device
Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629). Call SFC 56 and 57
when the CPU is in RUN in order to transfer the parameters set in STEP 7 to the analog
module.
The parameters are subdivided as follows for the 2 parameterization alternatives:
static parameters and
dynamic parameters
The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.
Parameter

Can be set with

CPU operating status

static

Programming Devices

STOP

dynamic

Programming Devices

STOP

SFC 55 in user program

RUN

Configurable characteristics
The properties of the analog modules can be programmed in STEP 7 at the parameter
blocks listed below:
for input channels
Basic settings (enables)
Limits (process interrupt triggers)
Diagnostics
Measurement
for output channels
Basic settings
Diagnostics
Default values
Output

Parameters of analog input modules


The tables provide an overview of the parameters for analog input modules and show what
parameters
are static or dynamic and
can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel group or a channel.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

131

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules
Table 3- 21

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Parameter

Range of values

Default setting

Type of
parameter

Effective range

Basic settings
Enable

Diagnostic
interrupt

yes/no

no

Process interrupt yes/no


triggered by
violation of limits

no

End-of-cycle
process interrupt

yes/no

no

dynamic

Module

dynamic

Channel

static

Channel group

Limit

Upper limit

from 32511 to -35512

32767

Lower limit

from -32512 to 32511

-32768

Diagnostics

Group
diagnostics

yes/no

no

with wire break


monitoring

yes/no

no

Measurement

Interference
frequency
suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10


Hz

50 Hz

dynamic

Channel group

Measurement
type

- deactivated

Voltage

dynamic

Channel group

- Voltage
- resistor with 4-wire
connection
- thermoresistor (RTD)
with linearization, 4-wire
connection
- Thermocouple with
linearization and
compensation at 0 C
- Thermocouple with
linearization and
compensation at 50 C
- Thermocouple with
linearization and internal
compensation
- Thermocouple with
linearization and external
compensation 1

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

132

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Parameter

Default setting
1V

Range of
measurement

1 This

Range of values

Type of
parameter
dynamic

Effective range
Channel group

type of measurement supports the following compensations:

Use of a compensation box


The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected.
All thermocouples must be of the same type.

Use of a thermal resistor for compensation (e.g. Pt100)


The absolute terminal temperature is determined for compensation with a Pt100 resistor in the
climatic range. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of different types.

Table 3- 22

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

parameter

Range of values

Default setting

Type of parameter

Effective range

Basic settings
Enable

Diagnostic
interrupt

yes/no

no

Process
interrupt
triggered by
violation of
limits

yes/no

no

End-of-cycle
process
interrupt

yes/no

no

dynamic

module

dynamic

Channel

static

Channel group

dynamic

Channel group

Limit

Upper limit

from 32511 to 32512

32767

Lower limit

from -32512 to
32511

-32768

Diagnostics

Group
diagnostics

yes/no

no

with wire break yes/no


monitoring

no

Measurement

Interference
frequency
suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50


Hz; 10 Hz

50Hz

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

133

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

parameter

Range of values

Default setting

Measurement
mode

4DMU Current (4wire transducer)

4-wire transducer

dynamic

Type of parameter

Channel group

Effective range

Range of
measurement

0...20 mA,
4...20 mA

4...20 mA

dynamic

Channel group

2DMU Current (2wire transducer)

Parameters of the analog output module


The following table provides an overview of the parameters of the analog output module that
are
static or dynamic and
can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel.
Table 3- 23

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Parameter

Range of values

Default setting

Type of parameter

Effective range

Basic settings

Enable
diagnostic
interrupt

yes/no

no

dynamic

Module

yes/no

no

static

Channel

dynamic

Channel

Diagnostics

Group
diagnostics
and wire break
monitoring

Substitute value

retain last
value

yes/no

no

Value

-32512...32511

-6912 (0 mA)

Output mode

deactivated

Current

dynamic

Channel

Output range

4...20 mA
0...20 mA

4...20mA

dynamic

Channel

Output

Current

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

134

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

3.10.4

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Definition
With the aid of the diagnostics function you can determine whether analog processing is
faulty or free of faults and which faults have occurred. On detecting a fault, the analog
modules output the signal value "7FFFH" irrespective of the parameterization.

Parameterizing diagnostics
You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

Diagnostic evaluation
With regard to diagnostic evaluation, differentiation is made between configurable and nonconfigurable diagnostic messages. In the case of configurable diagnostic messages,
evaluation only takes place when diagnostics has been enabled by means of
parameterization ("diagnostic enable" parameter). The non-parameterizable diagnostic
messages are always evaluated irrespective of the diagnostic enable.
Diagnostic messages trigger following actions:
SF LED on analog module lights,
if applicable channel fault LED,
Transfer of diagnostic message to CPU,
Diagnostic interrupt triggered (only if diagnostic interrupt has been enabled in the
parameterization).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

135

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Diagnostics of the analog input modules


The table below provides an overview of the parameterizable diagnostic messages of the
analog input modules. The enable is set in the "diagnostics" parameter block. The diagnostic
information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module.
Table 3- 24

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x


0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART
Diagnostic message

Effective range
of diagnostics

Configurable

Wire break 1

Yes

Undershoot of the measuring range


Overshoot of the measuring range
Reference channel fault

Yes,
(group error)

Channel

Incorrect parameters in module

No

Incorrect parameters in module


Module not configured
external auxiliary voltage missing 3
internal auxiliary voltage missing 3
Fuse blown 3
Time watchdog tripped

Module

No

EPROM error 4
RAM error 4
CPU error 4
ADU error 4
Hardware interrupt lost
1 If

wire-break monitoring is enabled and a wire break is detected at the 2-wire transducer (4 to
20mA), the AI 4 x 0 / 4 to 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART modules output a wire-break message
when the input current drops below I 3.6 mA (wire-break limit to NAMUR). The wire break message
is only deactivated (hysteresis), when the input current rises above 3.8 mA again.
In the case of the module AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD the line is checked by connecting a test current if wire
break diagnostics is enabled.

Only for thermocouples with external compensation and compensation fault.

Only for AI 4 x 0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART with 24 volt supply from L+.

4 The

tests are conducted during start-up and on-line.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

136

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Causes of error and remedies


However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output
the relevant programmable diagnostic messages.
Table 3- 25

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x


0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART - their possible causes of fault and remedies

Diagnostic message
Wire break

Undershoot of the measuring


range

on AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

on AI 4 x 0/4...20mA

Possible fault causes

Corrective measures

Break in the line between the


module and sensor

Connect line

Channel not connected (open)

Deactivate channel group


("Measurement mode"
parameter)

Input value below underflow


range, error possibly caused by:

incorrect type of thermocouple

Reversal of polarity at the


sensor connection. Incorrect
measuring range setting

Module does not report


measuring range undershoot

Sensor connected with


reverse polarity; (a digitized
value is output for 0 mA)

Check type of
thermocouple

Check connection
terminals

Configure a different
measuring range

Overshoot of the measuring range Input value exceeds overflow


range

Configure a different
measuring range

Reference channel fault

A different sensor type is set as


reference channel in the
measuring channels parameters

Parameterize different type


of sensor

Reference channel error (wire


break, for example. All measuring
channels values are 7FFFH

Eliminate fault in reference


channel

Incorrect parameters in module

Module supplied with invalid


parameters

Check parameterization of
module and re-load valid
parameters

Module not configured

Module not supplied with


parameters

Include module in
parameterization

external auxiliary voltage missing

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary voltage

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Fuse blown

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Time watchdog tripped

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference
sources

Module defective

Replace module

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

137

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Diagnostic message

Possible fault causes

EPROM error
RAM error
CPU error
ADU error
Hardware interrupt lost

Corrective measures

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference
sources and switch CPU
supply voltage OFF/ON

Module defective

Replace module

The CPU is unable to process


successive hardware interrupts
(violation of limits, end-of-cycle
interrupts) at this rate

Change interrupt processing


in CPU and reparameterize
module if necessary

Diagnostics of the analog output module


Table 3- 26

Diagnostic message of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA


Diagnostic message

Wire break

Effective range of diagnostics


Channel group

configurable
Yes

incorrect parameters in module

No

incorrect parameters in module


Module not configured
No internal auxiliary voltage
external auxiliary voltage missing
Fuse blown

Module

No

Time watchdog tripped


EPROM error 1
RAM error 1
CPU error 1
1 The
2

tests are conducted during start-up and on-line.

Wire break recognition at output values I > 100 A and output voltage > 12V

Causes of error and remedies


However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output
the relevant programmable diagnostic messages.
Table 3- 27

Diagnostic messages of analog output module SM 332; AO 4x0/4...20mA and their


possible causes and remedies

Diagnostic message
Wire break

Possible fault causes


Break in line between module
and actuator

Corrective measures
Connect line

Voltage at load resistor > 12V

Lower load resistance to 500

Channel not connected (open)

Deactivate channel
("Measurement mode"
parameter)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

138

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Diagnostic message

Possible fault causes

Corrective measures

incorrect parameters in module

Module supplied with invalid


parameters

Check parameterization of
module and re-load valid
parameters

Module not configured

Module not supplied with


parameters

Include module in
parameterization

external auxiliary voltage


missing

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary voltage

No module supply voltage L+

Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Fuse blown

module-internal fuse defective

Replace module

Time watchdog tripped

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference sources

Module defective

Replace module

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference sources


and switch CPU supply voltage
OFF/ON

Module defective

Replace module

EPROM error
CPU error
RAM error

Reading out diagnostic messages


You can read detailed diagnostic messages in STEP 7 by enabling the diagnostics functions
at the analog modules.

See also
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)

3.10.5

Interrupts of analog modules

Types of interrupts
In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts:
Diagnostic interrupt
Process interrupt

Parameterizing interrupts
You program the interrupts in STEP 7.

Default setting
The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

139

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Diagnostic interrupt
The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such
as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic
functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts
processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt
module (OB82).

Process interrupt
The working range is defined by programming a high and low limit. The module triggers a
process interrupt if the process signal, such as the temperature of an analog signal module,
is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are enabled. The interrupttriggering channel can be identified based on the local data of OB 40 in the user program.
Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the
CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are
no higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are
processed one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred.

Process interrupt lost


Channel events such as overshoot/undershoot of limits are saved to memory and trigger a
process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the
CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status
triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt
must be enabled.
Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this
channel.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40


The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of
OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in
word 8 of local data.
Byte

Variable

Data type

Description

6/7

OB40_MDL_ADDR

WORD

B#16#0

Address of the interrupt-triggering


module

As of 8

OB40_POINT_ADDR

DWORD

see the
following figure

Indication of the interrupt-triggering


inputs

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

140

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Figure 3-16

Start Information of OB40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to
synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes
the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the analog input module. The
module processes the channels in succession. When all measured values are successfully
converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement data at its channels to the
CPU by means of an interrupt.
With an end-of-cycle interrupt, bits 20 ... 23 and 28 ... 31 are set to 1. You can always use
this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.

3.10.6

Characteristics of Analog Modules

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state


The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage of
the analog module and on the operating status of the CPU.
Table 3- 28

Dependencies of analog input/output values on the CPU operating status and the supply
voltage L+

CPU operating
status
POWE
R ON

RUN

Supply voltage
L+ at analog
module
L+ applied

Parameters of analog input


modules

Output value of the


analog output module

Process value

CPU value

7FFFH up to first conversion


after switching on or after
module parameterization has
been completed

Up to first conversion ...

after switch-on has been


completed if signal of 0 mA
is output.

after parameterization has


been completed, previous
value is output.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

141

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

CPU operating
status

POWE
R ON

POWE
R OFF
1 only

STOP

Supply voltage
L+ at analog
module

Parameters of analog input


modules

Output value of the


analog output module

No L+

Overflow value 1

0 mA

L+ applied

Process value

Default/last value

7FFFH up to first conversion


after switching on or after
module parameterization has
been completed

at 0...20 mA: 0 mA default at


4...20 mA: 4 mA default

No L+

Overflow value 1

0 mA

L+ applied

0 mA

No L+

0 mA

applies to SM 331; AI 8xT C/4 x RTD as no L+ supply voltage is required.

Failure of the L+ supply voltage for the analog modules is always indicated by the group fault
LED on the module and additionally entered in diagnostics.
Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt is dependent on the parameterization.
Table 3- 29

Characteristics of analog modules dependent on the position of analog input value in


value range

The process value lies


within the

Input value

Rated range

Process value

Overrange/ underrange

SF LED
-

Diagnostics

Interrupt

Channel
fault LED
-

Process value

Overflow

7FFFH

lit

Entry made

lit

Underflow

8000H

lit

Diagnostic
interrupt 1

Wire break

7FFFH

outside parameterized
limit
1 depending
2 An

Process value

lit

lit
lit 1

Process
interrupt1, 2

on parameterization

active diagnostics error prevents the limit value process interrupt.

Example: An enabled wire break diagnostics renders limits below the wire break threshold ineffective.

Impact of the range of values on the output


The characteristics of the output modules depend on what part of the value range the output
values are in.
Table 3- 30

Characteristics of analog modules dependent on position of analog output value in value


range

Output value in

Output value

SF LED

Diagnostics

Interrupt

Channel
fault LED

Rated range

CPU value

Overrange/ underrange

CPU value

0 mA

Overflow

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

142

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Output value in
Wire break

Output value

SF LED

Diagnostics

Interrupt

Channel
fault LED

CPU value

lit 1

Entry

Entry

lit 1

made
1 depending

made

on parameterization

Influence of errors
Faults occurring in analog modules with diagnostic capabilities and corresponding
parameterization result in diagnostic entry and diagnostic interrupt. Refer to the respective
chapter for a list of faults.
The SF LED and, if applicable, the channel fault LED light on the analog module.
Faults which cannot be parameterized in diagnostics (e.g. fuse blown) result in an entry
being made in the diagnostic range and the fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU
operating status.

See also
Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 135)
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)

3.10.7

Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records


The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1:
Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the
module.
Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus
additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the
module.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

143

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Byte 0 to byte 3 (data records 0 and 1)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

144

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1)


Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics
information and the length of the channels.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

145

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

3.11

Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF000AB0)

Order Number
6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0

Features
Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD:
8 inputs in 4 channel groups
Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending
on the settings of interference frequency suppression
9 Bit + sign (integration time 2.5 ms) 400 Hz
12 Bit + sign (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms) 60/50 Hz
15 Bit + sign (integration time 100 ms) 10 Hz
Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:
Voltage
Resistance
Temperature
user-specific measurement range per channel group
configurable diagnostics
configurable diagnostic interrupt
2 channels with limit monitoring
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

146

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)
configurable limit interrupt
electrically isolated from the CPU
Common mode < 60 V between the channels
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected,
i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the
measured value.

Wiring diagram
View and wiring diagram of analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Figure 3-17

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

147

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Notes on the module


An external voltage supply L+ (24V) is not required for the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
x TC/4 x RTD.
If thermal resistors (e.g. Pt100) are used for external compensation, connect them to
channels 6 and 7.
If a compensation box is used for external compensation, connect it to channel 7.

Notes on the front connector


You can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ20-0AA0 only for the analog input module
6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0.
If you use a front connector, you attain a higher accuracy of temperature measurements with
thermocouples in the measurement mode "Internal compensation". The accuracy of the
internal reference junction temperature is 1.5 K when this front connector is used at
ambient temperatures from 0 to 60 C.
You can connect lines of 0.25 mm2 to 1 mm2.
The use of this front connector results in no restrictions regarding the licenses of the module.
Alternatively, you can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0, but without the
increased accuracy.

Parameterization
The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD are set
with STEP 7 (refer to the STEP 7 online help), or
in the user program with SFCs.

Default settings
The analog input module features default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts
etc..
These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed in STEP 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

148

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Channel groups
In the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are
combined to form one channel group. Parameters can always only be assigned to one
channel group, i.e. parameters which are specified for a channel group are always valid for
both channels of this channel group.
Table 3- 31

Allocating analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD to channel groups
Channel

Allocated channel group

Channel 0

Channel group 0

Channel 1
Channel 2

Channel group 1

Channel 3
Channel 4

Channel group 2

Channel 5
Channel 6

Channel group 3

Channel 7

Special feature of resistant measurement


Only one channel per channel group is required for the "resistance measurement". The "2nd"
of the group is used for current sinking (IC).
With access to the "1st" to read the measured value. The "2nd" channel of the group is
preset with the overflow value "7FFFH".
During diagnostics, the 1st channel provides the actual status (in compliance with
parameterization) and the 2nd channel "free of faults".

Non-connected input channels


You must short-circuit activated and non-connected channels of the analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD. This way you ensure optimum interference immunity for the
analog input module. Deactivate all non-connected channels in STEP 7 in order to reduce
module cycle times.

Configurable measuring modes


You can set the following measuring modes on the analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, make the setting in STEP 7.
Voltage measurement
Resistance measurement
Temperature measurement

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

149

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Supported ranges of measurement


The measuring ranges for which you can use the analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD can be found in the following tables. Define the relevant ranges of
measurement in STEP 7.

Wire-break monitoring
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD carries out wire-break monitoring for all
ranges if it is enabled via parameterization. The four wires used in resistance thermometer
mode (RTD) are monitored for wire break.

Voltage measurement ranges


measurement mode
selected
Voltage

Explanation

Measuring range

The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter 25 mV


Analog Representation for Voltage Measuring Ranges 50 mV
of Analog Inputs (Page 97).
80 mV
250 mV
500 mV
1V

Resistance measurement ranges


measurement mode
selected

Explanation

Measuring range

Resistor
4-wire connection

The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter


Analog value representation of the measurement
ranges of resistance sensors (Page 99).

150 ohms
300 ohms
600 ohms

Connectable types of thermocouple


The linearization of characteristic curves is specified for thermocouples in accordance with
DIN IEC 584.
For thermal resistor measurements, linearization of the characteristic curves is based on DIN
43760 and IEC 751.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

150

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)
Table 3- 32

Connectable thermocouples and thermal resistors

Measurement type

Explanation

Linearization and compensation


at 0 C

The digitized analog values for


the thermocouples listed are
found in the chapter Analog value
representation (Page 95).

Linearization and compensation


at 50 C

Linearization and compensation


internal comparison 1

Linearization and compensation


external comparison 2

(one unit corresponds to 0.1 C)

Measuring range
Type T [Cu-CuNi]
Type U [Cu-CuNi]
Type E [NiCr-CuNi]
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
Type N [NiCr-SiNiSi]
Type R [Pt13Rh-Pt]
Type S [Pt10Rh-Pt]
Type B [Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh]

Thermal resistance+
Linearization, 4-wire connection
(temperature measurement)

The digitized analog values for


the thermal resistors listed are
found in the chapter Analog value
representation (Page 95).

Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100


standard range
Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100
climatic range

1 In

the case of internal compensation in the module, all 8 channels are available for temperature
measurements also with different times of thermocouples.

The module returns the terminal temperature when the input is short-circuited.

This does not apply to thermocouple type B, which is not suitable for measurements in the
ambient temperature range.
2 This type of measurement supports the following compensations:
Use of a compensation box
The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected. Terminated at
channel 7.
Use of thermal resistors in climatic range (e.g. Pt100) for compensation.
The absolute terminal temperature is determined in the climatic range with a thermal resistor (e.g. Pt
100) for compensation purposes. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of
different types.
Terminated at channels 6 and 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

151

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

technical specifications
Analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 210 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

Number of inputs

with resistance sensor

Line length, shielded

yes
They return the value that applied
before the parameters were set.
8
4
max. 200 m
max. 50 m for
voltage ranges 80 mV and
thermocouples

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1061 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 V DC

Electrical isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

yes

between the channels

no

Permitted potential difference of signals of the Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus (UISO)

60 V DC

between the channels (UCM)

60 V DC

30 V AC
30 V AC

Insulation tested

Channels with respect to backplane bus

with 2500 V DC

Current input from backplane bus

max. 120 mA

Module power loss

typical 0.6 W

Permitted potential difference of signals of the non-Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus (UISO)

400 V DC

between the channels (UCM)

75 V DC

250 V AC
60 V AC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

152

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD


Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1061 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values per channel for thermocouples and thermal resistors

U0

(no-load output voltage)

max. 5.9 V

I0

(short-circuit current)

max. 28.8 mA

P0

(load power)

max. 41.4 mW

L0

(permissible external inductance)

max. 40 mH

C0

(permissible external capacity)

max. 43 F

Um

(error voltage)

max. 60 VDC

Ta

(permissible ambient temperature)

30 V AC
max. 60C

Connection of active encoders with the following limit values


Ui = 1.2V
Ii = 20 mA
deviating from the above-specified values

L0

(permissible external inductance)

max. 15 mH

C0

(permissible external capacity)

max. 14.6 F

Analog value formation


Principle of measurement

SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)

Configurable

yes

yes

yes

yes

20

100

Integration time in ms

2.5

162/3

Basic conversion time =

7.5

50

60

300

3 x integration time +

Transient recover time optomultiplexer in ms

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

additional conversion time for wire break recognition in


ms

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

Resolution in bit (incl. overrange)

9+sign

12+sig
n

12+sign

15+sign

Interference voltage suppression for interference


frequency f1 in Hz

400

60

50

10

Interference suppression, error limits


Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

Common-mode rejection (UISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

Normal-mode rejection (interference peak value < rated


value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V)

> 70 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input range)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

153

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

25 mV

50 mV

80 mV

250 mV/500 mV/1V

0.09 %
0.06 %
0.05 %
0.04 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range)

25 mV

50 mV

80 mV

250 mV/500 mV/1V

0.018 %
0.014 %
0.011 %
0.008 %

Temperature error (referred to input range)

25 mV

50 mV

80 mV

250 mV/500 mV/1V

0.0019 %/K
0.0013 %/K
0.0011 %/K
0.0010 %/K

Linearity error (referred to input range)

0.003 %

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred to


input range)

0.003 %

The accuracy of temperature measurement with external


compensation with thermal resistors is derived from:

Error for the analog input of the type


of thermocouple used

Accuracy 1 of the type of thermal


resistor used for compensation

Error 1 of the compensation input

Error for the analog input of the type


of thermocouple used

Accuracy 1 of the compensation box

Error 1 of the compensation input

Error for the analog input of the type


of thermocouple used

Accuracy 1 of the reference junction


temperature

Error for the analog input of the type


of thermocouple used

Accuracy 1 of the internal reference


junction temperature 2.5 K (in the
range 0 to 60 C

The accuracy of temperature measurement with external


compensation with compensation box is derived from:

The accuracy of temperature measurement with

compensation of the external reference junction maintained


at 0 C / 50 C is derived from:
The accuracy of temperature measurement with internal
compensation (terminal temperature) results from:

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

154

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD


Due to the constant increase in the thermocouple characteristic at higher temperatures, the error in
the compensation element is less effective than at temperatures in the vicinity of the compensation
temperature. Exception: Thermocouple types J and E (relative linear progression)
1

Due to the little increase in the range from approx. 0 C to 40 C, the lack of compensation of the
reference junction temperature has only a negligible effect in the case of thermocouple type B.

Deviation of measuring temperatures when using thermocouples type B without compensation and
measurement type "0 C compensation" setting:

700C and 1820C < 0.5C


500 C and 700 C < 0.7C.
"Internal compensation" should be set if the reference junction temperature closely corresponds to
the module temperature. This reduces the error for the temperature range from 500 C to 1820 C to
< 0.5 C.

Error limits of analog inputs for thermocouples


(at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)
Type

Temperature range

Basic error 1

Temperature error 2 [C/K]

-150 C...+400 C

0.2K

0.006

-230 C ... -150C

1K

U
E
J

-50 C...+400 C

0.2K

200 C....-50 C

1K

-100 C....+1000 C

0.2K

-200 C....-100 C

1K

-150 C....+1200 C

0.2K

-210 C ... -150 C

0.5K

-50 C...+1200 C

0.2K

-200 C....-50 C

1K

-100 C....+1372 C

0.2K

220 C....-100 C

1K

-50 C...+1300 C

0.2K

150 C....-50 C

1K

+200 C....+1769 C

0.3K

-50 C...+200 C

1K

+100 C....+1769 C

0.3K

-50 C...+100 C

1K

S
B

+700 C....+1820 C

0.3K

+500 C....+700 C

0.5K

+200 C....+500 C

3K

0.006
0.0075
0.02
0.02
0.018
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.04

Error limits of analog inputs for thermal resistors


(at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)
Type

Temperature range

Basic error 1

Temperature error 2 [C/K]

Pt100 climatic

-200 C....+325 C

0.05K

0.006

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

155

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Error limits of analog inputs for thermal resistors


Pt200 climatic

-200 C....+325 C

0.05K

0.006

Ni 100 climatic

-60 C....+250 C

0.05K

0.003

Pt100 standard

-200 C....+850 C

0.2K

0.01

Pt200 standard

-200 C....+850 C

0.2K

0.01

Ni 100 standard

-60 C....+250 C

0.1K

0.003

Error limits of analog inputs for resistance sensors


(at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)
Type

Resistance sensor

Basic error 3

Temperature error 2 [C/K]

150

0.000 .176.383

0.006%

0.001

300

0.000 .352.767

0.006%

0.001

600

0.000 .705.534

0.006%

0.001

The basic error includes the linearization error of the voltage temperature conversion and the basic
error of the analog/digital conversion at Tu = 25C.

The total temperature error = temperature error x max. ambient temperature change DTu as a
temperature difference with respect to 25C .

The basic error includes ADC error as a % value of the measuring range at Ta = 25 C.

The operating error for the use of thermocouples / thermal resistors consists of:
Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25C
Total temperature error
Errors which occur due to the compensation of the reference junction temperature
Errors of the thermocouple / thermal resistor used
The operating error for the use of thermal resistors consists of:
Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25C
Total temperature error
Error for the sensor used
Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Limit interrupt

configurable channels 0 and 2

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Configurable

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readout

possible

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

156

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Interrupts, diagnostics
Data for sensor selection
Input ranges (rated values) / input resistance

Voltage

25 mV

/10 M

50 mV

/10 M

80 mV

/10 M

250 mV

/10 M

500 mV

/10 M

1V

/10 M

150

/10 M

300

/10 M

600

/10 M

Thermocouples

Type:

/10 M

Resistance thermometer

Pt100, Pt200, Ni100

Resistance

T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R,
S, B
/10 M

Measuring current for thermoresistors and wire-break


checks

c. 0.5 mA

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction


limit)

Max. 35 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s


(pulse duty factor 1:10)

Connection of signal transducers


possible

for voltage measurement

for resistance measurement with 4-wire connection, possible


with 3-wire connection1 with 2-wire connection1

Characteristic linearization

Configurable

for thermocouples

Type :
T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R, S, B

for thermal resistors

Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 (standard and


climatic range)

Temperature compensation

Configurable

Internal temperature compensation

possible

external temperature compensation with


compensation box

possible

external temperature compensation with thermal


resistors (e.g. Pt100)

possible

Compensation for 0 C reference junction


temperature

possible

Compensation for 50 C reference junction


temperature

possible

without line resistance correction

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

157

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)

3.12

Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD000AB0)

Order Number

Features
Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA:
4 inputs in 4 channel groups
Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending
on the integration time set
10 Bit (integration time 2.5 ms)
13 Bit (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms)
15 Bit (integration time 100 ms)
Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:
Current
Channel deactivated
User-specific measurement range per channel
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
configurable diagnostics and configurable diagnostic interrupt
Channel 0 and 2 with limit value monitoring and configurable limit interrupt
The channels are electrically isolated from each other, from the CPU, and from load
voltage L+

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

158

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)
The analog inputs are HART-compatible
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected,
i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the
measured value.

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Figure 3-18

Module view and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

159

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

Additional measures
The SM 331-7RD00 (6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0) module reaches lower safety-relevant
technical data for the connection of active encoders (see the first amendment of the
certificate) if the unused transducer outputs (terminals 3, 7, 12 and 16) are locked with
plastic bolts. Use for example M3 x 8 plastic screws for this (see diagram below).

Load voltage supply

Process connector with screw-type connection

Ex (i) process cable

Intrinsically safe area

Line chamber

Plastic screw M 3 x 8

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

160

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

Parameterization
The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA are set
in STEP 7
in the user program with SFCs.

Default settings
The analog input module features default settings, for example, of the integration time, of
diagnostics functions, and of interrupts which apply if the module parameters were not edited
in STEP 7.

Channel groups
The channel group is allocated to each input channel for parameterization of the analog input
module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA. Advantage: You can specify separate parameters for
each channel! The table shows the allocation of the channels to channel groups:
Table 3- 33

Allocation of analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA to channel groups


channel

Allocated channel group

Channel 0

Channel group 0

Channel 1

Channel group 1

Channel 2

Channel group 2

Channel 3

Channel group 3

Configurable measuring modes


You set up the measurement types in STEP 7. You can set up the following measurement
types:
Current measurement
Channel deactivated

Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers


The table below shows the current measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers.
Define the relevant ranges of measurement in STEP 7.
Table 3- 34

Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers

measurement mode
selected

Explanation

2-wire transducer
4-wire transducer

Measuring range
from 4 to 20 mA

The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter


Analog Representation for Current Measurement
Ranges (Page 98).

from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

161

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

Wire-break monitoring
Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA. For the current range
from 4 to 20 mA, the input current dropping below I x 3.6 mA is interpreted as a wire break
and, if enabled, an appropriate diagnostic interrupt is triggered.

Influencing by HART signals


When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program
integration times of 162/3, 20 or 100 ms in order to keep the influence of AC modulation on
the measuring signal to minimum.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

162

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA


Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 290 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

yes
They return the process value that applied before
the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

Line length, shielded

max. 200 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1060 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 V DC

Rated load voltage L+

24 V DC

Reverse voltage protection

Transducer power supply

yes
yes

short circuit-proof

Electrical isolation

between the channels and backplane bus

yes

between the channels and load voltage L+

yes

between the channels

yes

between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the channels

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the channels and load voltage L+

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

between the channels and backplane bus

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

163

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

between the channels and load voltage L+

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

DC 75 V
AC 60 V

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage


L+

with 2500 V DC

Channels to each other

with 2500 V DC

Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+

with 500 V DC

Current input

from backplane bus

from load voltage L+

max. 60 mA
max. 250 mA

Module power loss

typical 3 W

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1060 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values per channel

U0 (no-load output voltage)

max. 25.2 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

max. 68.5 mA

P0 (load power)

max. 431 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

max. 7.5 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

max. 90 nF

Um (fault voltage)

max. DC 60V
AC 30V

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

max. 60C

Analog value formation


Principle of measurement

SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/resolution


(per channel)

yes

yes

yes

yes

2.5

162/3

20

100

configurable

Integration time in ms

Basic conversion time including integration


time in ms (several channels enabled)

7.5

50

60

300

Basic conversion time including integration


time in ms (one channel enabled)

2.5

162/3

20

100

Resolution in bit + sign (incl. overrange)

10+ sign

13+ sign

13+ sign

15+sign

Interference voltage suppression for


interference frequency f1 in Hz

400

60

50

10

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

164

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

Common mode interference


between channels and reference ground M of the CPU
(VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

Series mode interference (measured value + interference


signal must lie within the 0 mA to 22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input


range)

from 0/4 to 20 mA

0.45 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range)

from 0/4 to 20 mA

0.1 %

Temperature error (referred to input range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (referred to input range)

0.01 %

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred to input


range)

0.05 %

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range
Error at integration time

0.25%

2.5 ms

0.05%

162/3 ms

0.04%

20 ms

0.02%

100 ms

Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Limit interrupt

configurable channels 0 and 2

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Configurable

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readout

possible

Technical date of the transducer power supply

No-load voltage

Output voltage for transducer and cable at a transducer


current of 22 mA

< 25.2 V
> 13 V

(50 reference resistor on the module included)


Data for sensor selection
Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

Current

0 to 20 mA

/50

4 to 20 mA

/50

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

165

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)
Permissible input current for current input (destruction limit)

40 mA

Connection of signal transducers

for current measurement


as 2-wire transducer
as 4-wire transducer

possible
possible

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 99)
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)

3.13

Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES73325RD00-0AB0)

Order Number
6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0

Features
The analog output module SM 332, AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20 mA is characterized by the following
features:
4 current outputs in 4 groups
Resolution 15 bit
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported
configurable diagnostics

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

166

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)
Channels electrically isolated
Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+
Note
When switching the load voltage (L+) on and off, incorrect intermediate values can occur
at the output for approx. 10 ms.

Block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

Figure 3-19

Module view and block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation


You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed
configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.
In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing
panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

167

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

Parameterization
You set up the functionality designed for analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA
in STEP 7 or
in the user program with SFCs.

Default settings
The analog output module features default settings for output type, interrupts, default
settings etc..
These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed with STEP 7.

Channel groups
Table 3- 35

Allocation of 4 channels to 4 channel groups of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA


Channel

Allocated channel group

Channel 0

Channel group 0

Channel 1

Channel group 1

Channel 2

Channel group 2

Channel 3

Channel group 3

Unswitched output channels


To ensure that the unswitched output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x
0/4...20 mA are without voltage, you must deactivate them. You deactivate an output
channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

Analog outputs
You can connect the outputs as:
Current outputs
The outputs can be set channel by channel. You program the output type in STEP 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

168

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

Output ranges
Configure the various current output ranges in STEP 7.
Table 3- 36

Output ranges of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

selected output
mode
Current

Explanation
The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter Analog
value representation of the output range of the analog
outputs (Page 112).

Output range
from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA

Wire-break monitoring
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA carries out a wire break check.
Conditions:
A wire break can only be signaled if the minimum output current > 100 A and the voltage
generated at the load > 12 V.

Influence of load voltage dips on diagnostics messages


If the 24 V load voltage falls below the permitted rated range (< 20.4 V), there may be a
reduction in the output current at connected loads > 400 and output currents > 18 mA
before a diagnostic message is transmitted.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

169

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA


Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 280 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR

yes
They specify the output value that
applied before the parameters were set.

Number of outputs

Line length, shielded

max. 200 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 01ATEX1062 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,
Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 V DC

Rated load voltage L+

24 V DC

Reverse voltage protection

yes

Electrical isolation

between channels and backplane bus

yes

between channels and load voltage L+

yes

between the channels

yes

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

between channels and backplane bus

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between channels and load voltage L+

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the channels

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

DC 60 V
AC 30 V

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

between channels and backplane bus

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between channels and load voltage L+

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

between the channels

DC 400 V
AC 250 V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

170

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

DC 75 V
AC 60 V

Insulation tested

between the backplane bus and load voltage L+

with 2500 V DC

Channels to each other

with 2500 V DC

Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+

with 500 V DC

Current input

from backplane bus

from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Module power loss

max. 80 mA
max. 200 mA
typical 4 W

Analog value formation


Resolution (incl. overrange)

15 Bit

Cycle time (all channels)

9.5 ms

Transient recovery time

for resistive load

0.2 ms

for capacitive load

0.5 ms

for inductive load

0.2 ms

Switch substitute values

yes, configurable

Interference suppression, error limits


Crosstalk attenuation between outputs

> 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to


output range)

0.55 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to


output range)

0.2 %

Temperature error (referred to output range)

0.01 %/K

Linearity error (referred to output range)

0.02 %

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred


to output range)

0.005 %

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range)

0.02 %

Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostic functions

Configurable
Configurable

Group fault indication

red LED (SF)

Channel fault indication

red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readout

possible

monitoring for

Wire break

yes

as of output value and

> 0.1 mA

Output voltage

> 12 V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

171

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)
Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1062 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

max. 14 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

max. 70 mA

P0 (load power)

max. 440 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

max. 6.6 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

max. 730 nF

Um (fault voltage)

max. 60 VDC
30 VAC

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

max. 60C

Data for sensor selection


Output ranges (rated values)

Current

from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

for current outputs

resistive load

inductive load

capacitive load

max. 500
max. 6.6 mH1
max. 730 nF1

Current output

No-load voltage

max. 14 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages / currents

Voltages

Current

max. + 12 V / - 0.5V
max. + 60 mA / - 1A

Wiring of actuators

for current output


2-wire connection

yes

KEMA approval limitations

When used in a non-Ex areas, the following

resistive load max. 500

inductive load max. 15 mH

capacitive load max. 3 F


can be set as the load impedance.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)


If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs.
SF LED is lit:

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

172

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)
If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs
(on the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared
and the module is operating properly.
Remedy:
Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the
module, or
Inserting and removing modules

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)


... can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN
by means of CiR on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916).

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 23)
Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 26)
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)
Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges (Page 98)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

173

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules


3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

174

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

Most of the examples listed in this manual refer to the use of HART analog modules with
PROFIBUS DP interface modules.

Overview
There are two analog input modules and two analog output modules each with HART
functions in the product range of the SIMATIC S7 Ex-HART analog modules.
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),
Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0

(Revision 5)

Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0

(Revision 7)

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),


Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0

(Revision 5)

Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0

(Revision 7)

The electrical properties of Revision 5 and Revision 7 modules are identical. The modules
differ only in the interfaces (parameters, diagnostics, user data and HART request interface)
and in the HART functionality and the supported HART version.

4.1

Using HART analog modules

Basic characteristics
The SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules belong to the category of SIMATIC S7-Ex analog
modules. Their basic properties were described in section "Simatic S7 Ex analog modules"
and also apply here.
You can operate the HART analog modules as part of the distributed I/O ET 200M with the
interface modules:
As of IM153-2BA00 or as of IM153-2BB00 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP.
As of IM153-2BA20 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP for the modules 6ES7 331-7TB100AB0 and 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0.
As of IM153-4BA00 as coupling to PROFINET IO.
In this application, the ET 200M is the HART master for HART devices (intelligent field
devices). The IM153 directs the commands (for example, parameter assignment) that come
from the HART client
(for example, SIMATIC PDM or programmed via the data record interface of the HART
analog modules) through the HART analog module to the intelligent field devices. The reply
comes back the same way. In the figure below, the gray line represents the communication
path in an application with PROFIBUS DP.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

175

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.1 Using HART analog modules

Figure 4-1

Location of the HART analog modules in the distributed system

Application in the system


The HART analog modules are used in the distributed I/O connected to the PROFIBUS DP
or PROFINET IO.
You can connect one field device to each of the two channels on a HART analog module:
the module acts as a HART master, the field devices as HART slaves.
Various software applications, such as SIMATIC PDM, can send or receive data to or from a
transducer via a HART analog module. They can be compared to clients for which the HART
analog module is the server.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

176

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.2 Introduction to HART

4.2

Introduction to HART

4.2.1

Definition of HART

Introduction
This section provides you with an introduction to HART from a user's perspective:
Definition of HART
Advantages of HART analog modules
Typical applications of HART

Definition
"HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer"
The HART functions enable you to operate the analog modules in conjunction with digital
communication. The HART protocol is generally accepted as a standard protocol for
communication with smart field devices: Hart is a registered trademark of the "HART
Communication Foundation" (HCF), which retains all rights for the HART protocol. You can
find detailed information about HART in the HART specification.

Advantages of HART
The use of HART analog modules has the following advantages:
Compatible connection to analog modules: current loop 4 - 20 mA
additional digital communication with the HART protocol
low power requirements with HART, important for use in hazardous areas
a wide range of field devices with HART functions are now available
integration of the HART functionality in the S7 system when using HART analog modules

Typical applications
The following are typical applications of HART:
Installation of field devices (central assignment of parameters)
Modification of field device parameters online
Display of information, maintenance data and diagnostic data for field devices
Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

177

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.2 Introduction to HART

4.2.2

HART functions

Introduction
The HART protocol describes the physical characteristics of transmission: Data transfer
procedures, message structure, data formats, and commands.

HART signal
The following diagram shows the analog signal with the modulating HART signal (FSK
procedure). The HART signal is composed of sine waves at 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a
mean value of zero. It can be filtered out with an input filter, leaving the original analog signal
unaffected.

Analog signal

(A)

Response

(K)

Command

Time (seconds)

Figure 4-2

The HART signal

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

178

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.2 Introduction to HART

HART commands and parameters


The adjustable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with
HART commands and read using HART responses. The HART commands and their
parameters are defined in three groups with the following properties:
universal
common-practice
device-specific
Universal commands and their parameters must be supported by all manufacturers of HART
field devices; common-practice commands should also be supported. There are also devicespecific commands that apply to a particular field device.

Examples of HART parameters


The following table shows the HART parameters of the different groups:
Table 4- 1

Examples of HART parameters

Parameter group

HART field device parameters

universal

Measured or manipulated value (primary variable), manufacturer name,


process tags or final control element ID, additional measured values or
manipulated values

common-practice

Measuring range, filter time, interrupt parameters (message, alarm and


warning limits), output range

device-specific

special diagnostic information

Examples of HART commands


The following two tables provide examples of commands:
Table 4- 2

Examples of universal commands

Command

Function

Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field
devices be addressed by means of a short frame address

11

Read manufacturer and device type

Read primary variable and unit

Read current and percentage of the range, digitally as floating-point number


(IEEE 754)

Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary


variables, etc.)

13, 18

Read or write measuring point tag, description and date (data included in
transmission)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

179

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.2 Introduction to HART
Table 4- 3

Examples of common-practice commands

Command

Function

36

Sets the upper limit of the range

37

Sets the lower limit of the range

41

Carries out the device self-test

43

Sets the primary variable to zero

109

Switch burst mode on or off

Burst mode
Burst mode means that a command initiates cyclic response of the slave. This response is
sent repeatedly until the mode is deactivated by the master device.

Data and status


HART commands are often transmitted without data, because they are used to start a
processing function. HART responses always contain data. The HART response frame
always includes status data which you should evaluate in order to validate the response.

4.2.3

Application of HART

System environment for HART use


To use a smart field device with HART functionality, you require the following system
environment (see diagram below):
current loop 4 - 20 mA
HART configuration tool:
You can assign the HART parameters either with an external HART handheld device or
with the configuration tool, SIMATIC PDM. The configuration tool accesses the HART
analog module directly, whereas the HART hand-held device is connected parallel to the
field device. SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as autonomous
(stand-alone) tool or embedded in STEP 7 HW Config or PCS 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

180

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.2 Introduction to HART
HART system connection:
The HART analog module assumes the function of a "master," in that it receives the
commands from the HART configuration tool, forwards them to the field device, and then
sends back the responses. The interface of the HART analog module comprises data
records which are transmitted via the I/O bus. The data records must be created and
interpreted by the HART configuration tool.
Interface IM153-2 (PROFIBUS DP) and IM153-4 (PROFINET IO) for HART configuration
tool:
DP Connection which is capable of master class 1 as well as master class 2 functionality.

Figure 4-3

System environment required for HART

Error handling
The two HART status bytes transmitted with each response of the field device contain error
information relating to HART communication, HART commands and device status, (see
"HART communication data records").
These are evaluated by the HART analog module, among other devices, and made available
in the system via the S7 diagnostic mechanisms.

See also
HART Communication Data Records (Page 210)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

181

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

4.3

Guidelines for Installation and Operation

4.3.1

Example configuration

Application in the system


A sample configuration is used to show you how to start up a HART analog module with the
field devices connected, and the points you should take into consideration during operation.
You can find more information on the operation of the field devices in the integrated help for
SIMATIC PDM.

Figure 4-4

Use of a HART analog module in a sample configuration

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

182

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

Note
Notes on intrinsically-safe installation
You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the IM 153 interface module and
explosion-proof I/O modules, which include HART I/O modules, whose signal cables lead
into the hazardous area. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you
should use the explosion-proof partition (6ES7 195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy
module.

4.3.2

Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices

Installation
Commission the HART analog modules using STEP 7, and the intelligent field devices
connected using the SIMATIC PDM programming tool:
Configuring and assigning parameters
1. Plug the HART analog module into the ET200M distributed I/O system. "Configuring and
assigning parameters" to the associated station in the SIMATIC Manager with STEP 7:
Start by double-clicking on the "Hardware" icon.
2. Select the ET 200M distributed I/O with a High Feature IM153 from the module catalog
and attach this to the PROFIBUS (note the DP slave address) or PROFINET IO network.
3. Insert the HART analog module in the desired slot and assign the module parameters:
You start the parameter assignment dialog by double-clicking the HART analog module in
the selected slot.
With HART Revision 7 analog modules, you can also configure up to 8 additional HART
variables in the user data area of the module using the parameter assignment dialog in
HW Config. See 4.5.1 for more on this.
4. Insert the HART field devices in the corresponding channels.
When you insert a HART field device, the field device already connected in the "Device
Selection (Reassign)" configuration dialog is identified via the "Device identification".
5. Download the configuration for the station which also contains the parameters for the
HART analog module, to the programmable logic controller.
6. The field devices are configured with SIMATIC PDM via the channel to which the field
device is connected:
You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel.
7. Now you can configure the field devices using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool:
Within SIMATIC PDM, you see a device-specific configuration interface based on the
type of the connected field device. You must have installed the EDD of the field device,
the IM 153, and the HART analog module beforehand.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

183

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

Modifying the parameters of the field devices


Note that the field devices report a configuration change to the HART module whenever you
edit their parameters. This leads to a diagnostic interrupt on the programmable logic
controller, provided this option is enabled. During commissioning it can be advantageous to
disable the diagnostic interrupt when you assign parameters to the HART analog module.
A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, during parameter modification with
the handheld.

See also
Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 185)

4.3.3

Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices

Operating phase
In the operating phase you must distinguish between the cyclic return of user data, the
acyclic HART operation and the cyclic HART communication.
Cyclic process data such as the measured values can be requested from the automation
system PROFIBUS DP master class 1) The user data area with input and output data is
available for this.
the acyclic operation for diagnostics and modifying the parameters of the field devices is
carried out with the SIMATIC PDM parameter assignment tool or with a HART hand-held
device using HART commands and HART responses.
You can establish HART communication via read/write data record.
The operating phase
1. Switch the programmable logic controller to "RUN": User data are transmitted cyclically
via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.
2. You can evaluate the user data cyclically in your user program. With HART Revision 7
analog modules, up to four HART variables of the connected transducer are provided for
evaluation in the user data.
3. You can perform diagnostics and re-configuration of field devices with the configuration
tool, SIMATIC PDM:
You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel.
4. You can send HART commands to the connected transducers at any time via the data
record interface of the HART analog modules. For example, you can re-configure the
transducers or read data from the transducers.
See 4.4.6.3 for Revision 5 modules or 4.5.7.3 for Revision 7 modules.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

184

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Access to the field devices


The HART analog module generally accepts the modification of parameters for the field
devices. Access rights can only be allocated using the configuration tool.

Modifying the parameters of the field devices


To modify the parameters of the field devices connected to the HART analog modules,
proceed as follows:
1. To modify the parameters of a field device, enter a HART command using the SIMATIC
PDM configuration tool.
2. The HART analog module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects new field device
parameters, provided diagnostics interrupts are enabled.

Information on status
After you have modified the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit is set
in the device status of the connected field device (= HART status byte). This should be
regarded as an indicator and not as an error and is reset by the module. For more
information, see the "HART status bytes" section.

See also
Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules (Page 188)

4.4

HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Overview
The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section:
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),
Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),
Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0
This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface.

4.4.1

Parameters of HART Analog Modules

Overview of the parameters


The following table lists the parameters for the HART analog input module, the next table
lists the parameters for the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

185

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5
can be set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each
channel. General information on assigning parameters can be found in the description of the
SIMATIC-Ex analog modules.

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Table 4- 4

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter

Value range

Default setting

Type of
parameter

Effective range

Basic settings enables

Diagnostic interrupt

Yes/no

No

Hardware interrupt
triggered by limit
violation

Yes/no

No

End-of-cycle
hardware interrupt

Yes/no

No

Overflow
(32767)

Dynamic

Module

Dynamic

Channel

Static

Channel

Dynamic

Channel

Limit for hardware interrupt

High limit

20 ...0/4 mA (from
32511 to - 32512)

Low limit

0/4 ...20 mA (from - Underflow (32512 to 32511)


32767)

Diagnostics

Group diagnostics

Yes/no

No

with wire break


monitoring

Yes/no

No

Deactivated

HART

Measurement

Measurement type

4DMU Current (4wire transducer)


2DMU Current (2wire transducer)
HART (connected
to 2DMU or 4DMU)

Measuring range

0 to 20 mA (can
only be set with
4DMU),
4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Integration time /
interference
frequency
suppression

2.5 ms; 16.6 ms;


20 ms; 100 ms

20 ms

corresponds to
interference
frequency
suppression
From 400 Hz; 60
Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

186

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

HART measurement
The green HART status display indicates that HART measurement is enabled at a channel
and that HART communication is active. When HART starts up, the HART analog module
transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13. The
resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), are entered in
the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module
continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This
value is entered in the user data area.

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Table 4- 5

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter

Value range

Default setting

Type of
parameter

Effective range

Basic settings enable

Diagnostic interrupt

Yes/no

No

Dynamic

Module

Yes/no

No

Static

Channel

Deactivated

HART

Dynamic

Channel

Diagnostics

Group diagnostics

Output
Output mode

Current
HART
Output range

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA
Reaction to CPU STOP

Output with zero


Set substitution
current and voltage value (SSV)
(OCV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Set substitution
value (SSV)

Substitute value

0 to 20mA

0 mA

HART output mode


If you have activated the HART output mode for a channel and HART communication is
running, the green HART status display lights up. When HART starts up, the HART analog
module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13.
The resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), is entered
in the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module
continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This
value is entered in the user data area.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

187

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

See also
Additional diagnostic data records (Page 214)
Input area (read) (Page 218)
Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 130)

4.4.2

Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules

Overview of diagnostic functions


If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase,
you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior
of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog
modules.

Diagnostic messages
The diagnostic messages for the analog input modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic
messages of the analog input module SM 331"; the diagnostic messages for the analog
output modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic messages of the analog output module
SM 332". The additional diagnostic messages are listed in the following table:
Table 4- 6

Additional diagnostic messages for the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA
HART and the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART
Diagnostic message

Effective range of
diagnostics

configurable with group


diagnostics

Modification of HART parameters reported


by the connected field device

Channel

Yes

HART group error

Yes

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

188

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Causes of error
The following table provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures
for the individual diagnostic messages.
Table 4- 7

Additional diagnostic messages, possible causes of the errors, and remedies

Diagnostic message

Possible cause of error /


diagnostics

Corrective measures

Modification of HART
parameters reported by
the connected field
device

The identifier for the modification of


parameters to the HART field
device was set in the HART device
status.

If you do not want diagnostic


interrupts to be triggered when
parameters are modified, you
should disable the diagnostic
interrupt.

HART group error

Communication and command error For detailed information, evaluate


during HART operation affecting the the response data record of the
connected HART field devices.
relevant client or the additional
diagnostic data record.

HART status bytes


Each HART command is followed by a HART response containing data and status bytes.
The status bytes provide information regarding
Device status of the connected field device (e.g. modification of parameters)
Communication error during transmission between HART analog module and the
connected field device
Command error during interpretation of the HART command by the connected field
device (warning, rather than error)
The HART status bytes are entered in the response data record unchanged. Their
significance is described in the technical specifications for HART. You can read the device
status in your user program by using SFC59 or SFB 53 to read the corresponding data
records.

See also
Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 135)
HART Communication Data Records (Page 210)
Additional diagnostic data records (Page 214)

4.4.3

Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules

Overview of the interrupts


The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex
analog modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

189

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Hardware interrupts with AI-HART


In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-ofcycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware
interrupt is active.
Table 4- 8

Local data in OB40

Local data OB40

Bit 7 ...2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Limit

Byte 0

'0'

Channel 1

Channel 0

High limit exceeded

Byte 1

'0'

Channel 1

Channel 0

Low limit exceeded

Byte 2

'0'

'0'

'0'

Not relevant

Byte 3

'0'

'0'

'0'

Not relevant

At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which
are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to
evaluate whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a
limit has been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0".

See also
Interrupts of analog modules (Page 139)
Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 185)

4.4.4

HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB000AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0

Features
The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following
features:
2 inputs in 2 channel groups
2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers
The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog
values and resolution")
Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:
2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (with HART function)
2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (no HART function)
Channel deactivated

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

190

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5
User-specific measuring range per channel
0 to 20 mA (no HART function)
4 to 20 mA
Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt
Group diagnostics
Additional wire break monitoring
Diagnostic interrupt
Programmable hardware interrupt
Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits
hardware interrupts
Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt
Electrical isolation
Channels electrically isolated
Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution


The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331;
AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15
bits + sign.
Table 4- 9

Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Selected measuring type

Measuring range

2-wire transducer

4 to 20 mA

4-wire transducer

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Integration times when HART is used


When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program
integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal
to a minimum.

Default settings
HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time,
diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter
modification is carried out in STEP 7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

191

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Wire break check


Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA.
For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I 3.6 mA is
interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers
a diagnostic interrupt.

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA

Figure 4-5

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

192

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Note
The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This
means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14)
and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15).
The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without
HART.
Note
Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

Special feature for the connection of active encoders


Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect
active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x
8 plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below).
Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on
safety data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

193

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Load voltage supply

Process connector with screw-type connection

Ex (i) process cable

Intrinsically safe area

Line chamber

Plastic screw M 3 x 8

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

194

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0)


Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 260 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

Yes
They return the process value that applied
before the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

Number of power outputs

Line length, shielded

Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 97ATEX3039 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4


Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 VDC

Rated load voltage L+

24 VDC

Reverse voltage protection

Yes

2-wire transducer power supply

short circuit-proof

Yes (approx. 30 mA)

Electrical isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

Between the channels and backplane bus

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

195

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Between the channels and backplane bus

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the channels

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

75 VDC
60 VAC

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage


L+

With 2500 VDC

Channels to each other

With 2500 VDC

Backplane bus to load voltage L+

With 500 VDC

Current input

From backplane bus

Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L +

Max. 180 mA

Module power loss

typical 4.5 W

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values per channel

U0 (no-load output voltage)

Max. 26 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

Max. 96.1 mA

P0 (power under load)

Max. 511 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

Max. 3 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

Max. 62 nF

Um (fault voltage)

Max. DC 250V

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

0 to 60C

Analog value formation


Principle of measurement

SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion
time/resolution (per channel)

Configurable

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Integration time in ms

2.5

16 2/3

20

100

Basic conversion time plus


integration time in ms (one
channel enabled)

2.5

16 2/3

20

100

Basic conversion time including


integration time in ms (2
channels enabled)

7.5

50

60

300

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

196

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Resolution in bits +sign


(including the overshoot range)

Interference voltage
suppression for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

10 +sign

13+ sign

13+ sign

15+sign

400

60

50

10

Interference suppression, error limits


Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

Common mode interference


between channels and reference ground M of
the CPU (VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

Series mode interference (measured value +


interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to
22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB


Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range)

from 0/4...20mA

0.45%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, based on input range)

from 0/4...20mA

0.1%

Temperature error (based on input range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on input range)

0.01%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C,


based on input range)

0.05%

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range
Error at integration time

2.5 ms

0.25%

16 2/3 ms

0.05%

20 ms

0.04%

100 ms

0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Limit interrupt

configurable channels 0 and 1

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Configurable

Group error display

Red LED (SF)

Channel error display

Red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readable

Possible

HART communication active and OK

Green LED (H)

Technical date of the transducer power supply

No-load voltage

< 29.6 V

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

197

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Output voltage for transducers and cables at


22 mA transducer current
(50 W measurement resistance on module
included)

> 15 V

Data for sensor selection


Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

Current

Permissible input current for current input


(destruction limit)

0 to 20 mA;

/50

4 to 20 mA:

/50

40 mA

Connection of signal transducers

for current measurement

as 2-wire transducer

Possible

as 4-wire transducer

Possible

See also
Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 99)
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
HB_Umparametrieren im RUN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916)

4.4.5

HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES73325TB00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0

Features
The HART analog output module has the following features:
2 current outputs in 2 channel groups
Resolution 12 bit (+ sign)
Output type selectable per channel:
Current output with HART
Current without HART
Channel deactivated

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

198

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5
Selection of any output range per channel
0 to 20 mA (no HART function)
4 to 20 mA
Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt
Group diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt
Electrical isolation
Channels electrically isolated
Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+
Read-back capability of the analog outputs
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution


The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM
332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output
module is, however, 12 bit.
Table 4- 10

Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA


Selected output mode

Current

Output range
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Default settings
The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute
value, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no
parameters have been changed in STEP 7.

Wire break check


Wire break monitoring is possible for the current range 0/4 to 20mA.
Condition: Minimum output current > 500 A

Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message


When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650
are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced
before a diagnostic message is issued.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

199

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Readback capability
The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8
bit. Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the
corresponding accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed.

Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Figure 4-6

Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note
Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

200

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

Non-wired output channels


To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO
2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an
output channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

201

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0)


Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

Approx. 280 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Yes

Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR

They output the output value that applied before


the parameters were set.

Number of outputs

Line length, shielded

Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 97ATEX2359 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4


Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 VDC

Rated load voltage

24 VDC

Reverse voltage protection

Yes

Electrical isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

Between the channels and backplane bus

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

Between channels and backplane bus

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between channels and load voltage L+

400 VDC
250 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

202

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Between the channels

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

75 VDC
60 VAC

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage


L+

With 2500 VDC

Channels to each other

With 2500 VDC

Backplane bus to load voltage L+

With 500 VDC

Channels with respect to shield

With 500 VDC

Current input
From backplane bus

Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Max. 150 mA

Module power loss

Typical 3.5 W

Analog value formation

Output value
Resolution (including overrange)

12 bit (+ sign)

Cycle time (all channels)

5 ms

Transient recovery time

for resistive load

2.5 ms

For inductive load

2.5 ms

For capacitive load

4 ms

Set substitute values

Yes, configurable

Readback value
Resolution

8 bit (+ sign)

Conversion time (per channel)

40 ms

Interference suppression, error limits


Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs

>130 dB

Operational limit (across temperature range,


relative to output range)

0.55%

Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25C


relative to the output range)

0.15%

Temperature error (relative to the output range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on output range)

0.03%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C,


based on output range)

0.005%

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output 0.02%


range)
Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostic functions

Configurable
Configurable

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

203

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Group error display

Red LED (SF)

Channel error display

Red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readable

Possible

Monitoring for

Wire break
From output value

HART communication active and OK

Yes
> 0.5 mA
Green LED (H)

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of the output circuits (per
channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

Max. 19 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

Max. 66 mA

P0 (power under load)

Max. 506 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

Max. 7.5 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

Max. 230 nF

Um (fault voltage)

Max. 60 VDC

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

Max. 60C

Data for actuator selection


Output ranges (rated values)

Current

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

for current outputs

Resistive load

Inductive load

Capacitive load

Max. 650
Max. 7.5 mH1
Max. 230 nF1

Current output

No-load voltage

Max. 19 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages /


currents
Voltages

Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V

Current

Max. + 60 mA / - 1A

Wiring of actuators

For current output


2-wire connection

Yes

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

204

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5
KEMA approval limitations can be set
as the load when used in non-ex areas

Inductive load max. 15 mH

Capacitive load max. 3 F *)


*) HART communication no longer possible, however

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 112)
Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 185)
HB_Umparametrieren im RUN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916)

4.4.6

Data record interface

Introduction
This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART
communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or
deploy your own software tool for HART communication.

Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7


You can configure and assign parameters of the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The
integrated help system supports you in this.
You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic
data in your user program by means of SFCs.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

205

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

4.4.6.1

Parameter Data Records

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog input
The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the
dynamic parameters for AI-HART and AO-HART.

Figure 4-7

Parameters of the HART analog input module

Table 4- 11

Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module

Measurement type

Code

Measuring range

Code

Deactivated

2#0000

Deactivated

2#0000

4-wire transducer

2#0010

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

2#0010
2#0011

2-wire transducer

2#0011

4 to 20 mA

2#0011

HART (2-wire or 4-wire


transducers can be connected)

2#0111

4 to 20 mA HART

2#1100

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

206

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output
The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the
dynamic parameters.

Figure 4-8

Parameters of the HART analog output module


Table 4- 12

Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module

Output mode

Code

Output range

Code

Deactivated

2#0000

Deactivated

2#0000

Current output without HART

2#0010

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

2#0010
2#0011

Current output with HART

2#0111

4 to 20 mA HART

2#1100

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

207

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

4.4.6.2

Diagnostic data records

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data


The diagnostic data for a module can be up to 16 bytes long and consist of data records 0
and 1:
Data record 0 contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4 bytes that are set on a systemwide basis and apply to both HART analog inputs and outputs.
Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data of an S7-300 that are also in data
record 0 and 6 bytes of module class-specific diagnostic data.

Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1

Figure 4-9

Diagnostic data: data record 0/1

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

208

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Diagnostic data: data record DS1


The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 9 of the diagnostic data.

Figure 4-10

Diagnostic data: data record 1

Note
Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data:
If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 or SFB
53 to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the
additional diagnostic data record for the relevant channel.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

209

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

See also
HART Communication Data Records (Page 210)
Additional diagnostic data records (Page 214)

4.4.6.3

HART Communication Data Records

Transfer data records


HART communication can be operated by up to 7 clients each using two separate channels.
There are 14 separate data transfer areas for this purpose, 7 for channel 0 and 7 for channel
1. Each transfer area consists of a command data record and a response data record.

Coordination rules for HART communication


Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers:
Channel

Client / data
record

Command

10

14

18

22

26

30

34

Response

12

16

20

24

28

32

36

Command

50

54

58

62

66

70

74

Response

52

56

60

64

68

72

76

Each client may only use the data record numbers allocated to its transfer area.
For example, for client 6, channel 0: the command is data record 30 and the response is
data record 32.
After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data
record before it writes the next command data record.
The transfer area of each client is allocated a data ready bit in the user data area, which
is set when new data can be collected.
In Master Class 2 the client can evaluate the "processing state" in the response data
record: if the "processing state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains
current response data or error bits respectively.
All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read
operation returns a successful or faulty state.
The status section of the response data record provides information on any errors that
have occurred.
The HART burst mode cannot be used by more than one client at any one time (that is,
only one client can set this operating mode with a command).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

210

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Structure of the command data record


The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a
command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command
to the connected HART field device.

Figure 4-11

Command data record of the HART analog module

Notes on the command


The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous
command has been read. In order to prevent interim execution of the commands of other
clients, the client must set the "indivisible command sequence" bit in its command:
The inseparable command sequence is maintained as long as the bit "inseparable
command sequence" is set.
The inseparable command sequence is terminated if the bit "inseparable command
sequence" is not set, or automatically after 10 seconds by the module.
While an inseparable command sequence is set for one client, one command from each
of the other clients can be stored temporarily in the buffer. The stored commands are
processed once the inseparable command sequence has been terminated.

Notes on response
Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record.
If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the
data record contains current response data or error messages respectively.
Alternatively you can evaluate the "data ready" in the user data area: the transfer area of
each client is allocated a bit in the user data area which is set when new data arrives.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

211

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Structure of the response data record


The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the
response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits.

Figure 4-12

Response data record of the HART analog modules

Evaluating the response data


When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following:
Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command
sent.
You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors.
You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see
following table) and both HART status bytes.
In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1".

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

212

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5
Table 4- 13
Bit No.

HART group error displays


HART group error display

Meaning

always 0

not used

command rejected

Used in the following cases:


For a module command which does not exist.
If you try to activate the burst mode when it is
already activated.
If you try to deactivate the burst mode when it
was activated by another client.
If you try to change the polling address of the
HART field device.

further status information available.

Corresponds to bit 4 in the 2nd HART status byte.


You can obtain further status information with the
HART command 48.

HART device status--> "Modification


of parameters" entry in diagnostic
data, data record 1

The field device transmits its device state. This


information is found in the 2nd HART status byte
which is accepted unchanged.

HART command status

The field device transmits displays on the receipt


of the command. Information on this can be found
in the 1st HART status byte.

Error during HART communication-> "HART group error" entry in


diagnostic data, data record 1

The field device has detected a communication


error while receiving the command. Information
on the error can be found in the 1st HART status
byte which is accepted unchanged.

HART protocol error during


response--> "HART group error"
entry in diagnostic data, data record
1

Error during HART communication between field


device and module, i.e. the response was
incorrectly received. Information on the cause of
the error can be found in the next byte.
See following table.

Wire break--> parallel entry "Wire


break" in diagnostic data, data
record 1

The connection to the transducer or final control


element is interrupted.

Table 4- 14
Bit No.

HART protocol error during response from field device to module


HART protocol error in byte 2

Meaning

bad frame timing

Waiting time elapsed without response being


received from field device.

always 0

not used

bad character transmission timing

The pause between two bytes was not observed.

checksum error in response

The checksum calculated does not match the


checksum transmitted.

Response frame error

Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

Response overrun error

Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

Response parity error

Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

HART access not possible

The connection to the field device is permanently


used. This error is registered if the transmission
time exceeds 10 seconds.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

213

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

4.4.6.4

Additional diagnostic data records

Additional diagnostic data


The additional diagnostic data provide information on the state of the HART communication
following the last command.
Additional diagnostic data record 128 for channel 0, 129 for channel 1
Additional diagnostic data record 130 for channels 0 and 1: When the module starts up
the recognized connected HART field devices and their identifiers ("tags") are entered
here.
Additional diagnostic data records 131 for channel 0 and 151 for channel 1 with the data
for the identifiers found in the additional diagnostic data record 130.

Structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129


The following figure shows the structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129.

Figure 4-13

Diagnostic data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

214

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Structure of the diagnostic data record 130


The diagram below shows the structure of diagnostics data record 130 from which you can
request the identification of connected HART transducers or final control elements.

Figure 4-14

Diagnostic data record 130 of the HART analog modules

Structure of the diagnostic data records 131 and 151


These contain the data corresponding to the identifiers marked in data record 130: The
address of the HART field device found and the HART identifier with measuring point tag or
final control element identifier. The structure is illustrated in the following diagram.
Data record 131 for channel 0 (length: 38 bytes)
Data record 151 for channel 1 (length: 38 bytes)

Figure 4-15

Diagnostic data records 131 and 151 of the HART analog module

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

215

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

4.4.6.5

Additional parameter data records

Structure of the parameter data records 128 and 129


The following diagram shows the structure of the additional parameter data records 128 for
channel 0 and 129 for channel 1. The settings affect the assigned channel:

Figure 4-16

Parameter data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules

Notes on the additional parameters


The additional parameters comprise parameters which you do not normally need to change,
as they have already been set to an optimized value: The following table provides
explanations of the parameters and the default values.
Table 4- 15

Additional parameters of the HART analog modules

Parameter
Repeated attempts

Wire break filter time 1

Update time

Explanation
The HART analog modules initiate the
configured retry sequence when
sending a command to a field device
whose port is in use by another
function.

Value range and default setting


Value range:
Default
setting:
No repeat
attempts:

0 to 127
3
0

A wire break is only signaled if it occurs Value range:


for longer than the set filter time.
Default
setting:
no filter time:

0 to 20
3 0.75 s
0

The HART modules send the HART


command 1 automatically, to read the
present value of the primary variable.

0 to 255, 12
3s

Value range:
Default
setting:
no filter time:

Several diagnostics interrupts may be generated during startup due to differences in the timerelated startup characteristics of transducers. The wire break filter time was introduced to avoid this
problem.
1

Default parameter assignment for DP master class 2


HART analog modules which are not in parameterized state, for example after power failure,
can receive default parameters from PROFIBUS DP master class 2 when the PLC is in OFF
state. This is carried out with the aid of parameter data record No. 250 which consists of one
byte with the value unequal 0. However, the assignment of default parameters can only be
initiated when the module is in an unparameterized state. You can determine the state of the
module by reading the diagnostic data record.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

216

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

4.4.6.6

User data interface

Overview of the user data


The user data range of the HART analog modules includes the following for both channel 0
and channel 1:
Current as analog input value or analog output value
Primary variable in HART format (measured value or manipulated variable)
Identifiers for clients to indicate that new data can be collected.
Relative addresses are specified in the description of the user data. Determine the module
address offset using the "Configuring and programming" application in STEP7.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

217

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Input area (read)


Structure of the user data
The following figure shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog input
module. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Read
peripheral data" (for example, L PIW 256) and evaluated in your user program.

Figure 4-17

Input user data area of the HART analog modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

218

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Output Area (write)


Structure of the user data
The following diagram shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog output
modules. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Write
peripheral data" (for example, L POW 256) and evaluated in your user program.

Figure 4-18

4.5

User data area of the HART analog output module

HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Overview
The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section:
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),
Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),
Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0
This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface.
The HART Analog Modules Revision 7 offer the following in comparison to Revision 5
modules:

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

219

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
You can use HART 5, HART 6 and HART 7 transducers.
You can also configure up to 8 additional HART variables in the user data area of the
module using the parameter assignment dialog in HW Config.
The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on
the PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0. See 4.5.7.3.

Requirement
The HART Analog Modules Revision 7 can be used as of STEP7 V5.5 + SP4 and
SIMATIC PCS 7 V8.1.
The modules can be used on PROIFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO in connection with the
respective High Feature interface modules
IM 153-2, 6ES7153-2BA02-0XB0 or
IM 153-4, 6ES7153-4BA00-0XB0.
Integration of the HART analog modules based on the PROFINET IO standard is possible
with the current GSDML file (as of GSDML V2.3 Siemens ET200M 20140124.xml) for
IM153-4.
Field devices can be configured with SIMATIC PDM V6.1 and higher or SIMATIC PDM V 8.1
SP 1.
You need the EDD for the ET 200M for this. For PROFIBUS DP as of EDD V1.1.17 and
PROFINET IO as of EDD V770.1.2.

4.5.1

Configuring HART variables

Introduction
Numerous HART field devices make available additional measurement variables (e.g.
sensor temperature). These can be read if they are set accordingly in the field device
configuration in SIMATIC PDM.
Using the HART variables it is possible to adopt the set measured values directly from the
field device into the I/O area of your automation system.
A maximum of 8 HART variables can be configured for HART modules. You assign the
HART variables to a channel in the properties dialog for the module.

Address assignment
The HART modules use 16 input/output bytes (user data). If you configure HART variables,
the modules use an additional 5 bytes of input data for each HART variable.
If you use all 8 HART variables, the HART modules use a total of 56 input bytes (16 bytes +
8 x 5 bytes = 56 bytes).
The "None" configuration occupies no additional input bytes.
No HART variables are placed in the user data area for configuration in run (CIR). However,
an additional 5 bytes of address space are reserved for a subsequent re-configuration.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

220

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Configuration of HART variables


You assign the HART variables in STEP 7 HW Config.
You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel
PV (Primary Variable)
SV (Secondary Variable)
TV (Tertiary Variable)
QV (Quaternary Variable)
If you want to assign the HART variable later in the user program, use the CiR parameter.
CiR is a placeholder that reserves the address space for a HART variable. You must
configure the HART variables you are not using with the "None" parameter.

Example of a configuration of HART variables


The figure below shows an example for the configuration of HART variables.

Figure 4-19

Example of a configuration of HART variables

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

221

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Structure of HART variables


Each HART variable uses 5 bytes of input data and is structured as follows:

Structure of the "Quality Code" byte


The Quality Code (QC) can assume the following values:
Quality Code (QC)

Meaning

0x4C or 0

Initialization: 0 value of IM and 4C of module

0x18

Communication cancelled / no communication

0x0C

Fault in HART device

0x47

HART device is busy

0x84

OK "Configuration changed"

0x80

OK

Reassign HART variables in RUN mode


You can reassign HART variables in RUN mode in S7-400 automation systems with CiR
capability and also in S7-400H systems.
Requirement: HART variable must already be configured in HW Config as PV, SV, TV, QV,
or CiR.

4.5.2

Parameters of HART Analog Modules

Overview
The following tables contain the parameters of the HART analog input module and the
parameters of the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters can be
set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each channel.
You can find general information on parameter assignment in the description of the SIMATIC
analog modules in the Manual Automation System SIMATIC S7-300 Module Data.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

222

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Table 4- 16

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter

Value range

Default setting

Type of
parameter

Effective range

Dynamic

Module

Dynamic

Channel

Static

Channel

Dynamic

Channel

Basic settings enables

Diagnostic interrupt

Yes/no

No

Hardware interrupt
triggered by limit violation

Yes/no

No

End-of-cycle hardware
interrupt

Yes/no

No

Limit for hardware interrupt

High limit

At 0 to 20mA:
Overflow
23.52 to -3.52mA (32767)
At 4 to 20mA:
22.81 to 1.185mA

Low limit

At 0 to 20mA:
Underflow
-3.52 to 23.52mA (-32768)
At 4 to 20mA:
1.185 to 22.81mA

Diagnostics

Group diagnostics

Yes/no

No

with wire break monitoring Yes/no

No

HART group diagnostics

Yes/no

No

Deactivated

4DMU
(4-wire
transducer)

Measurement

Measurement type

4DMU (4-wire
transducer)
2DMU (2-wire
transducer)

Measuring range

Deactivated

Integration time /
Interference frequency
suppression

2.5 ms; 16.6 ms;


20 ms; 100 ms

4 to 20 mA

0...20 mA
(can only be set
with 4DMU)
4 to 20mA

20 ms

Corresponds to
Interference
frequency
suppression
From 400 Hz; 60
Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

223

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
HART

HART function

Yes/no

Yes

Retries

0-255

10

Dynamic

Channel

Wire break check


The wire break check is only possible if group diagnostics is enabled and the measuring
range is 4 to 20mA.

HART function
The HART functionality is only possible in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA. When the HART
function is activated, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field
device, cyclically followed by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the
HART field device is established, the green HART status display lights up.

HART group diagnostics


HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected
HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not
selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible.

Parameters of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Table 4- 17

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter

Value range

Default
setting

Type of parameter

Effective
range

Yes/no

No

Dynamic

Module

Group diagnostics

Yes/no

No

Static

Channel

HART group diagnostics

Yes/no

No

Deactivated

Current

Dynamic

Channel

Basic settings enable

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostics

Output
Output mode

Current
Output range

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA
Reaction to CPU STOP

Output with zero


current and
voltage (OCV)

Set
substitution
value (SSV)

Keep last value


(KLV)
Set substitution
value (SSV)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

224

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Substitute value

0 to 20mA

0mA

HART

HART function

Yes/no

Yes

Retries

0-255

10

Dynamic

Channel

HART function
HART is only possible in the output range 4 to 20mA. When the HART function is activated,
the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, cyclically
followed by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the HART field device is
established, the green HART status display lights up.

HART group diagnostics


HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected
HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not
selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible.

4.5.3

Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules

Overview of diagnostic functions


If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase,
you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior
of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog
modules.

Diagnostic messages to which parameters can and cannot be assigned


We distinguish between diagnostic messages to which parameters can be assigned and
those to which they cannot be assigned.
You only obtain configurable diagnostic messages if you have enabled diagnostics at the
relevant parameters. Assign the parameters in the "Diagnostics" configuration dialog in
STEP 7.
The analog module always provides non-configurable diagnostic messages, regardless of
the enable state of diagnostic functions.

Actions after a diagnostic message in STEP 7


Every diagnostic message initiates the following actions:
The diagnostic message is entered into the diagnostics of the analog module.
The group error LED (SF LED) on the analog module is lit.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

225

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
The channel error LED also lights for channel-specific errors.
When "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" is set in STEP 7, the system triggers a diagnostic
interrupt and calls the OB 82 in the CPU.

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules


All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors,
regardless of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a
disabled channel.

Diagnostic message via LED


The analog modules indicate module-specific as well as channel-specific errors with their SF
LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights up as soon as the analog module detects an
error. It goes out once all errors are resolved.
In addition, channel-specific errors are displayed via the corresponding channel error LED.

"Analog" diagnostic messages


Table 4- 18

"Analog" diagnostic messages

Diagnostic message

Effective range of
diagnostics

Configurable

External auxiliary voltage missing

Module

No

Parameter assignment error

Channel

No

Wire break

Channel

Yes

Underflow
(only with analog input and if no wire
break check is enabled)

Channel

Yes

Overflow
(only with analog input)

Channel

Yes

Module not configured


Incorrect parameters
Time watchdog tripped
EPROM error
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Hardware interrupt lost

Overflow
Acquired analog values above 23.52 mA (for measuring range 0 to 20 mA) or 22.81 mA (for
the measuring range 4 to 20mA) are reported as "overflow" if group diagnostics are enabled.
The analog value is set to 0x7FFF. It has no effect on the HART communication.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

226

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Underflow
A current less than 1.1845 mA is reported as "underflow" if group diagnostics are enabled
and wire break diagnostics are disabled. The analog value is set to 0x8000. No HART
communication is possible below 1.1845 mA.

Wire break
A current less than 3.6 mA is reported as "wire break" with analog input if group diagnostics
and wire break diagnostics are enabled. Wire break is reported as cleared for a current
higher than 3.8 mA. The analog value is set to 0x7FFF for "wire break". HART
communication is active up to 1.1845 mA.
A wire break check is performed for analog output in the measuring range 4 to 20mA if group
diagnostics are enabled . A wire break is reported for a current lower than approximately 500
A. No HART communication is possible with "wire break".

Causes of error and remedies for "analog" diagnostic messages


Table 4- 19

Diagnostic messages of analog input module, causes of error and remedies

Diagnostic message

Possible cause of error

Remedy

external auxiliary
voltage missing

No load voltage L+ in the


module

Provide L+ supply

Module not configured

Startup error

Program the module

Incorrect parameters

Implausible parameter or
combination thereof

Program the module

Time watchdog tripped

partially high electromagnetic


interference

Eliminate interference sources

EPROM error

Replace the module

RAM error

Module defective

ADC/DAC error

Module defective

Replace the module

Hardware interrupt lost

Hardware interrupts are


triggered faster than the CPU
can process them

Check the system, if necessary, use a


more powerful CPU

Parameter assignment
error

A parameter or combination of
parameters of parameter data
record 1 is implausible

Check parameters and transfer them to


the module again

A parameter of the HART


parameter data records
(131/132) is incorrect
Wire break

Resistance of transducer circuit


too high

Use a different type of sensor or modify


the wiring, for example, using a larger
conductor cross-section

Break in the line between the


module and sensor

Connect line

Channel not connected (open)

Disable channel ("Measuring type"


parameter)
Wire the channel

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

227

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Underflow

Input value below underflow


range, error possibly caused by:

Configure a different measuring range

Wrong measuring range setting

Overflow

The sensor could be connected


the wrong way in the measuring
range 4 to 20 mA

Check connection terminals

Input value exceeds overflow


range

Configure a different measuring range

"HART" diagnostic messages


Table 4- 20

Additional HART diagnostic messages of the analog input module

Diagnostic message

Effective range of
diagnostics

Configurable

HART communication error

Channel

Yes

Main variable outside limits


Secondary value outside of limits
Analog output saturated
Analog output fixed current intensity
Further status information available
Configuration changed
Field device malfunction

HART communication error


Communication error with HART field device of HART group diagnostics are enabled.
All remaining HART diagnostic messages are reported by the connected field device in the
HART status bytes and displayed by the analog module as a diagnostic result.

HART status bytes


Each HART command is followed by a HART reply that contains data and two status bytes.
The status bytes provide information regarding
Device status of the connected field device (e.g. parameter modification)
Communication error during transmission between the HART analog module and the
connected field device
Command error in the interpretation of the HART command through the connected field
device (warning rather than error message).
The HART status bytes are accepted unchanged in the HART reply record. Their
significance is described in the technical specifications for HART.

Causes of error and remedies with "HART" diagnostic messages


The following table contains the possible causes of the errors described in the additional
diagnostic messages and the remedies.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

228

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Table 4- 21

Additional HART diagnostic messages, possible causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message

Possible cause of error /


diagnostics

HART communication
error

HART field device not


responding

Timing error

Main variable outside


limits

Secondary value outside


of limits

Analog output saturated

Analog output fixed


current intensity

Corrective measures

Check the process wiring

Correct the parameter


assignment.

Current less than 1.1845 mA

Increase number of assigned


retries

Analog input: Connect a


capacitor of approximately 150
nF in parallel to the transducer

Check the parameter


assignment of the HART device

Incorrect parameters in the


HART device

HART device has simulation,

and simulation is set to "Primary


variable outside the limits"

Incorrect measuring point

Primary variable parameterized


outside the limits

Incorrect parameters in the


HART device

HART device has simulation,


and simulation is set to "Nonprimary variable outside the
limits"

Incorrect measuring point

Primary variable parameterized


outside the limits

Incorrect parameters in the


HART device

HART device has simulation,


and the measured value set for
the simulation is too high

Incorrect measuring point

Primary variable parameterized


outside the limits

Incorrect parameters in the


HART device

HART device has simulation,


and the measured value set for
the simulation is too high

Incorrect measuring point

Primary variable parameterized


outside the limits

Correct simulation
Check whether the correct
sensor is connected

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

229

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Further status
information available

(deleted after 3 s)

HART device supplies further


status.

Read out status and correct, if


necessary

Configuration changed

The identifier for the parameter


modification of the HART field
device was set in the HART device
status (= HART status bytes).

If you do not want diagnostic


interrupts to be triggered when
parameters are modified, you
should disable the diagnostic
interrupt.

Field device malfunction

Communication and command error For detailed information analyze the


during HART operation affecting the reply record of the corresponding
connected HART field devices.
client or the diagnostic data record.

See also
Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 135)
HART Communication Data Records (Page 210)
Additional diagnostic data records (Page 214)
Diagnostic data records (Page 208)

4.5.4

Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules

Overview of the interrupts


The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex
analog modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt.

Hardware interrupts with AI-HART


In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-ofcycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware
interrupt is active.
Table 4- 22

Local data in OB40

Local data OB40

Bit 7 ...2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Limit

Byte 0

'0'

Channel 1

Channel 0

High limit exceeded

Byte 1

'0'

Channel 1

Channel 0

Low limit exceeded

Byte 2

'0'

'0'

'0'

Not relevant

Byte 3

'0'

'0'

'0'

Not relevant

At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which
are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to
evaluate whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a
limit has been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0".

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

230

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

See also
Interrupts of analog modules (Page 139)
Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 185)

4.5.5

HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES73317TB10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0

Features
The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following
features:
2 inputs in 2 channel groups
2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers
The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog
values and resolution")
Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:
2-wire transducer current
4-wire transducer current
Channel deactivated
User-specific measuring range per channel
0 to 20 mA (only for 4-wire transducer)
4 to 20 mA
HART functionality (only for 4 to 20 mA)
Support for HART 5 to HART 7
Configuring HART variables
Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt
Group diagnostics
Additional wire break monitoring
Diagnostic interrupt
Programmable hardware interrupt
Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits
hardware interrupts
Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

231

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Electrical isolation
Channels electrically isolated
Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution


The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331;
AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15
bits + sign.
Table 4- 23

Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART


Selected measuring type

Measuring range

2-wire transducer

4 to 20 mA

4-wire transducer

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Integration times when HART is used


When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program
integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal
to a minimum.

Default settings
HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time,
diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter
modification is carried out in STEP 7.

Wire break check


Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA.
For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I 3.6 mA is
interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers
a diagnostic interrupt.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

232

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA

Figure 4-20

Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note
The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This
means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14)
and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15).
The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without
HART.
Note
Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

233

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Special feature for the connection of active encoders


Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect
active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x
8 plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below).
Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on
safety data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate.

Load voltage supply

Process connector with screw-type connection

Ex (i) process cable

Intrinsically safe area

Line chamber

Plastic screw M 3 x 8

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

234

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0)


Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

approx. 260 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR

Yes
They return the process value that applied
before the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

Number of power outputs

Line length, shielded

Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 97ATEX3039 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4


Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 VDC

Rated load voltage L+

24 VDC

Reverse voltage protection

Yes

2-wire transducer power supply

short circuit-proof

Yes (approx. 30 mA)

Electrical isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

Between the channels and backplane bus

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

235

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

Between the channels and backplane bus

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the channels

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

75 VDC
60 VAC

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage


L+

With 2500 VDC

Channels to each other

With 2500 VDC

Backplane bus to load voltage L+

With 500 VDC

Current input

From backplane bus

Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L +

Max. 180 mA

Module power loss

typical 4.5 W

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values per channel

U0 (no-load output voltage)

Max. 26 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

Max. 96.1 mA

P0 (power under load)

Max. 511 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

Max. 3 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

Max. 62 nF

Um (fault voltage)

Max. DC 250V

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

0 to 60C

Analog value formation


Principle of measurement

SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion
time/resolution (per channel)

Configurable

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Integration time in ms

2.5

16 2/3

20

100

Basic conversion time plus


integration time in ms (one
channel enabled)

2.5

16 2/3

20

100

Basic conversion time including


integration time in ms (2
channels enabled)

7.5

50

60

300

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

236

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Resolution in bits +sign


(including the overshoot range)

Interference voltage
suppression for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

10 +sign

13+ sign

13+ sign

15+sign

400

60

50

10

Interference suppression, error limits


Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

Common mode interference


between channels and reference ground M of
the CPU (VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

Series mode interference (measured value +


interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to
22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB


Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range)

from 0/4...20mA

0.45%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, based on input range)

from 0/4...20mA

0.1%

Temperature error (based on input range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on input range)

0.01%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C,


based on input range)

0.05%

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range
Error at integration time

2.5 ms

0.25%

16 2/3 ms

0.05%

20 ms

0.04%

100 ms

0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Limit interrupt

configurable channels 0 and 1

Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

Configurable

Group error display

Red LED (SF)

Channel error display

Red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readable

Possible

HART communication active and OK

Green LED (H)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

237

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Technical date of the transducer power supply

No-load voltage

< 29.6 V

Output voltage for transducers and cables at


22 mA transducer current
(50 W measurement resistance on module
included)

> 15 V

Data for sensor selection


Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

Current

Permissible input current for current input


(destruction limit)

0 to 20 mA;

/50

4 to 20 mA:

/50

40 mA

Connection of signal transducers

for current measurement

as 2-wire transducer

Possible

as 4-wire transducer

Possible

See also
Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 99)
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
HB_Umparametrieren im RUN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916)

4.5.6

HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES73325TB10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0

Features
The HART analog output module has the following features:
2 current outputs in 2 channel groups
Resolution 12 bit (+ sign)
Output type selectable per channel:
Current output
Channel deactivated

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

238

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Selection of any output range per channel
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
HART functionality
Support for HART 5 to HART 7
Configuring HART variables
Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt
Group diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt
Electrical isolation
Channels electrically isolated
Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+
Read-back capability of the analog outputs
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution


The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM
332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output
module is, however, 12 bit.
Table 4- 24

Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA


Selected output mode

Current

Output range
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Default settings
The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute
value, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no
parameters have been changed in STEP 7.

Wire break check


Wire break check is possible for the output range 4 to 20 mA.

Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message


When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650
are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced
before a diagnostic message is issued.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

239

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Readback capability
The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8
bit. Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the
corresponding accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed.

Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Figure 4-21

Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note
Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

240

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure


In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the
line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous
location.

Non-wired output channels


To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO
2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an
output channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

241

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0)


Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

40 x 125 x 120

Weight

Approx. 280 g

Module-specific data
Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Yes

Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR

They output the output value that applied before


the parameters were set.

Number of outputs

Line length, shielded

Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals
II 3 G (2) GD
Ex nA [ib] [ibD] IIC T4
Test number

KEMA 97ATEX2359 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4


Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials


Bus power supply

5 VDC

Rated load voltage

24 VDC

Reverse voltage protection

Yes

Electrical isolation

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Between the channels

Yes

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

Between the channels and backplane bus

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels and load voltage L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the channels

60 VDC
30 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

60 VDC
30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

Between channels and backplane bus

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between channels and load voltage L+

400 VDC
250 VAC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

242

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Between the channels

400 VDC
250 VAC

Between the backplane bus and load voltage


L+

75 VDC
60 VAC

Insulation tested

Channels to backplane bus and load voltage


L+

With 2500 VDC

Channels to each other

With 2500 VDC

Backplane bus to load voltage L+

With 500 VDC

Channels with respect to shield

With 500 VDC

Current input
From backplane bus

Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Max. 150 mA

Module power loss

Typical 3.5 W

Analog value formation

Output value
Resolution (including overrange)

12 bit (+ sign)

Cycle time (all channels)

5 ms

Transient recovery time

for resistive load

2.5 ms

For inductive load

2.5 ms

For capacitive load

4 ms

Set substitute values

Yes, configurable

Readback value
Resolution

8 bit (+ sign)

Conversion time (per channel)

40 ms

Interference suppression, error limits


Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs

>130 dB

Operational limit (across temperature range,


relative to output range)

0.55%

Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25C


relative to the output range)

0.15%

Temperature error (relative to the output range)

0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on output range)

0.03%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C,


based on output range)

0.005%

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output 0.02%


range)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

243

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostic functions

Configurable
Configurable

Group error display

Red LED (SF)

Channel error display

Red LED (F) per channel

Diagnostic information readable

Possible

Monitoring for

Wire break
From output value

HART communication active and OK

Yes
> 0.5 mA
Green LED (H)

Safety specifications
(see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))
Maximum values of the output circuits (per
channel)

U0 (no-load output voltage)

Max. 19 V

I0 (short-circuit current)

Max. 66 mA

P0 (power under load)

Max. 506 mW

L0 (permissible external inductance)

Max. 7.5 mH

C0 (permissible external capacity)

Max. 230 nF

Um (fault voltage)

Max. 60 VDC

Ta (permissible ambient temperature)

Max. 60C

Data for actuator selection


Output ranges (rated values)

Current

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

for current outputs

Resistive load

Inductive load

Capacitive load

Max. 650
Max. 7.5 mH1
Max. 230 nF1

Current output

No-load voltage

Max. 19 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages /


currents
Voltages

Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V

Current

Max. + 60 mA / - 1A

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

244

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Wiring of actuators

For current output


2-wire connection

Yes

KEMA approval limitations can be set


as the load when used in non-ex areas

Inductive load max. 15 mH

Capacitive load max. 3 F *)


*) HART communication no longer possible, however

See also
The LK 393 line chamber (Page 20)
Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 112)
Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 185)
HB_Umparametrieren im RUN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14044916)

4.5.7

Data record interface

Introduction
This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART
communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or
deploy your own software tool for HART communication.

Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7


You can configure and parameterize the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The integrated
help system supports you in this.
You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic
data in your user program by means of SFCs.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

245

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Reading and writing records


To read and write records, use the following SFCs / SFBs:
Read record:
SFC 59 "RD_REC
SFB 52 "RDREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! )
Write record:
SFB 53 "WRREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! )
SFC 55 "WR_PARAM"
SFC 58 "WR_REC"

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

246

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

4.5.7.1

Parameter Data Records

Structure of the parameter records 0/1 for the HART analog input
The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the
dynamic parameters for AI-HART and AO-HART.

Figure 4-22

Parameters of the HART analog input module

Table 4- 25

Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module

Measurement type

Code

Measuring range

Code

Deactivated

2#0000

Deactivated

2#0000

4-wire transducer

2#0010

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0010
2#0011
2#0111

2-wire transducer

2#0011

4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0011
2#0111

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

247

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output
The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the
dynamic parameters.

Figure 4-23

Parameters of the HART analog output module

Table 4- 26

Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module

Output mode

Code

Output range

Code

Deactivated

2#0000

Deactivated

2#0000

Current output

2#0010

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0010
2#0011
2#0111

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

248

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Structure of the HART parameter data records 131/132


There is a specific HART parameter data record for each channel:
Data record 131: HART parameter data for channel 0
Data record 132: HART parameter data for channel 1

Figure 4-24

Data record

These records are not absolutely necessary for the HART operation.
If these records are not transferred to the module after module startup, the HART interface
works with the specified initial values. The number of HART retries and the HART enable are
used in accordance with the parameter data record 1.
However, both HART parameter data records can write to the module at any time during
operation for each data record (for example, using SFC 58 "WR_REC"). The parameters are
applied accordingly by the respective HART channel and overwrite the values currently in
effect.
This way you can also adjust the "Number of preamble bytes", the "Client timeout" as well as
the HART mode to suit your needs.
The transferred HART parameters are not used if an error occurs in DR131 / DR132. The
previous values remain in effect. The error is reported as channel-specific parameter
assignment error in diagnostic data record 1.
Each new parameter assignment with parameter data record 1 sets the HART parameters
back to the "initial values".

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

249

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

4.5.7.2

Diagnostic data records

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data


The diagnostic data of a module consists of the data records 0 and 1:
Data record 0 has a length of 4 bytes and contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4
bytes that are defined system-wide and are valid for HART analog input and output.
Data record 1 has a length of 16 bytes and contains
4 bytes of diagnostic data for an S7-300, which are also in data record 0 and another
8 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data

Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1

Figure 4-25

Diagnostic data: data record 0

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

250

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Diagnostic data: data record DS1


The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 11 of the diagnostic data. Bytes 12 to
15 are always zero.

Figure 4-26

Diagnostic data: data record 1

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

251

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Note
Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data:
If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 / SFB 52
to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the additional
diagnostic data record for the relevant channel.

See also
HART communication and information data records (Page 252)

4.5.7.3

HART communication and information data records

Overview
The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on the
PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0. You can find more information on the HART protocol
in the PROFIBUS DP HART Profile Application Guidelines.
You can obtain this documentation from the PNO (PROFIBUS Users Organization) on the
Internet at http://www.profibus.com.

Table 4- 27

Overview

Data record
number

Read/write

Size in bytes

Name

148

Read

13

Directory Process Data

DR information (directory record): This data record contains the record numbers
(index) of all HART data records and information on numbers and revisions.
149

Read

HMD Feature Parameter Process Data

Optional HART functions (HART feature flags): This data record describes which
optional HART functions are supported and specifies the maximum data field length
of the request/response records.
80, 82

Write

240

HART Request Write Process Data

HART request records to field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1) the
transfer data for the command from the client to the HART field device.
81, 83

Read

240

HART Response Read Process Data

HART response records from field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1)
the transfer data for the reply from the HART field device to the client.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

252

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Coordination rules for HART communication


HART communication can be operated only by one client per channel. Each channel has a
separate transfer area available. Each transfer area consists of the command and reply data
records.
If a channel is operated by several clients, the reply made available by the module cannot be
securely allocated to one client. The module does not support client management, refer to
data record number 149 (HMD Feature Parameter Process Data).
Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers:
Channel

Client

Data record

Command

80

Response

81

Command

82

Response

83

After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data
record before it writes the next command data record.
The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the reply data record: if the "processing
state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or
error bits respectively.
All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read
operation returns a successful or faulty state.
The status component in the reply record (= HART status bytes) provides information on
whether and which errors have occurred.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

253

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Structure of the command data record


The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a
command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command
to the connected HART field device.

HART commands are processed both in Transparent Message Format and in the Compact
Message Format, see technical specification for HART. The response data from the module,
however, is always provided in the transparent format.

**

Processing a sequence of HART commands as a SHC sequence (Successive HART


Command Mode)

Figure 4-27

Command data record of the HART analog module

SHC sequence
If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved
for HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no internal HART command (command
3) is sent to the transducer with this channel.
Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module once again reserves this
channel for another 2 seconds for the HART commands. If a HART command without a set
SHC bit is detected for this channel, or if no further command for this channel occurs within 2
seconds after the previous HART command, then command 3 is cyclically sent to the
transducer for reading the HART variables for the channel.

Notes on the command


The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous
command has been read.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

254

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Notes on response
Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record.
If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the
data record contains current response data or error messages respectively.

Structure of the response data record


The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the
response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits.

Figure 4-28

Response data record of the HART analog modules

Evaluating the response data


When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following:
Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command
sent.
You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors.
You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see
following table) and both HART status bytes.
In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1".
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules
Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

255

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Table 4- 28

HART group error displays in response byte 1 (extended response control)

Bit no.

HART group error display

Meaning

Further status information available

Corresponds to bit 4 in the channel-specific


error bytes in diagnostic data record 1 (2nd
HART status byte). The HART command 48
provides you with further status information, if
required.

HART communication error --> HART


communication error entry in
diagnostic data record 1

The field device has detected a communication


error while receiving the command. The error
information is contained in the 1st HART status
byte (in the reply record or diagnostic data
record 1) which is accepted without changes.

Parameter check

0: HMD parameters unchanged


1: Check HMD parameters

Always 0

Reserved

4-7

HART protocol error for reply -->


HART communication error entry in
diagnostic data record 1

Error during HART communication between


field device and module, i.e. the response was
incorrectly received.
0: Unspecified error
1: HMD error
2: Channel error
3: Command error
4: Query error
5: Response error
6: Query rejected
7: Profile query rejected
8: Vendor-specific query rejected
9 - 15: Not used
You can find information on the cause of the
error in response byte 2. See the table below.

Table 4- 29

HART protocol error in response byte 2 for the response from the field device to the
module (error code)

Error

HART protocol error in byte 2

Meaning

Unspecified error

0: Not specified

HMD error

0: Unspecified
1: Internal communication error
2: Parameter assignment error
3: HW error
4: Wait time expired
5: HART timer expired

Channel fault

0: Unspecified
1: Line error
2: Short circuit
3: Open line
4: Low current output
5: Parameter assignment error

Command error

0-127: HART protocol,


Bit 7=0

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

256

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

4.5.7.4

Error

HART protocol error in byte 2

Meaning

Query error

HART protocol,
Bit 7=1
Bit 0: Reserved
Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Checksum error
Bit 4: Frame error
Bit 5: Overflow error
Bit 6: Parity error
Bit 7: 1

Reply error

HART protocol, Bit 7=1


Bit 0: GAP timeout
Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2: Timeout
Bit 3: Checksum error
Bit 4: Frame error
Bit 5: Overflow error
Bit 6: Parity error
Bit 7: 1

Query rejected

0: Unspecified
1: Short format not supported
2: SHC not supported
3: Impermissible command
4: No resources

Profile query rejected

0: Not specified (not supported)

Vendor-specific query rejected

0: Not specified (not supported)

Example of HART programming


For the HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in Transparent Message Format to
the HART device with the address "98 CF 38 84 F0". A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital
input module leads to the writing of the HART command.
The following assumptions are made:
The module address of the HART analog module in the ET 200M is 512 (200H).
The record is stored in DB80: starting at address 0.0, length 11 bytes.
In this example, DB80 (request record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

257

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Table 4- 30

FC80: Writing of the record to DB80 with SFC 58

STL

Explanation

A I 4.0
FP M 101.0
= M 104.0
m2: CALL SFC 58
REQ :=M104.0

Write request

IOID :=B#16#54

Address range ID

LADDR :=W#16#200

Module address of the HART-AI

RECNUM :=B#16#50

Data record number 80

RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE 11

Data record with length of 11 bytes


(must correspond to the exact length
that is to be transferred)

RET_VAL :=MW93

RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...)

BUSY :=M51.0

Write operation not yet completed

U M 51.0
SPB m2
BE

Table 4- 31

DB80: Transparent Message Format

Byte

Initial value (hex)

Comment (Hex)

00

Req_Control
(00 = Transparent Message Format.
40 = Transparent Message Format with SHC sequence)

05

Number of preamble bytes (05-14)

82

Start character
(02 = Short Frame with command 0)
(82 = Long Frame with other commands)

98

CF

38

Address
(with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and
has the value 0.)

84

F0

01

Command (CMD)

00

Length in bytes

10

98

Check sum (CHK)


(calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the
next to last byte)

A HART command can also be sent in Compact Message Format. In this case, the data that
is to be transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

258

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Table 4- 32

DB80: Compact Message Format

Byte

Initial value (hex)

Comment (Hex)

20

Req_Control
(20 = Compact Message Format.
60 = Compact Message Format with SHC sequence)

05

Number of preamble bytes (05-14)

01

Command (CMD)

00

Length in bytes

You can find out when the reply was received by cyclically reading record DS81 for HART
channel 0. The response is always supplied in Transparent Message Format.
Table 4- 33

FC81: Reading of the reply to DB81 with SFC 59

STL

Explanation

m3: CALL SFC 59


REQ :=1

Read request

IOID :=B#16#54

Address range ID

LADDR :=W#16#200

Module address of the HART-AI

RECNUM :=B#16#51

Data record number 81

RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE 75

Data record

RET_VAL :=MW100

RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...)

BUSY :=M49.1

Read operation not yet completed

U M 49.1
SPB m3
BE

The program part U M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously.
As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the reply has not been received from the field device.
Once bit 2 = 1 in byte 0, positive response data are available from field devices, which you
can evaluate.
If the response data is invalid, see Tables "HART group error displays in response byte 1
(extended response control)" or "HART protocol error in response byte 2 in response from
the field device to the module (error code)" in this manual.

4.5.7.5

User data interface

User data interface - input area (read)


Structure of the user data
The figure below shows the structure of the input user data area of the HART analog
modules beginning with the correspondingly configured module address.
If you have configured HART variables, then these are made available justified after byte 15.
Each configured HART variable uses 5 input bytes, see section 4.5.1.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

259

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
You can read in the data of the user data area (e.g. with L PEW 256) and evaluate it in your
user program.

Figure 4-29

Input user data area of the HART analog modules

User data interface, output range (writing)


Structure of the user data
The figure below shows the structure of the output user data area of the HART analog output
module beginning with the correspondingly configured module address. You can transfer the
data to the user data area in a permissible format (e.g. with T PAW 256).
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

260

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7
Both the analog input as well as the analog output occupy 16 bytes in the output area. In the
case of the analog input, writing has no effect.

Figure 4-30

User data area of the HART analog output module

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

261

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules


4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

262

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Certificates
A.1

Overview of diagnostic functions

Introduction
The EU special test certificates and EU certificates of conformity for the modules described
in this manual can be found on the Internet:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)

Example
In the "Entry list" tab, select under filter settings:
Entry type: Certificates
Certificate Type: Certificates of conformity
Search item(s): 6ES7321-7RB00-0AB0

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

263

Certificates
A.1 Overview of diagnostic functions

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

264

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Standards and licenses


B.1

Standards and licenses

Introduction
In this section you will find
standards and test values satisfied by modules of the S7-300 automation system and ET
200M.
test criteria according to which the S7-300/ET 200M Ex I/O modules were tested.

Safety notes
WARNING
Do not remove plug-in connectors during operation
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
In potentially explosive environments, there is a risk of personal injury or damage to
property if you disconnect any connectors while the S7-300/ET200M is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300/ET 200 operated in such areas before you disconnect any
connectors.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Components may no longer qualify for Class I, Div. 2 if they are replaced.
WARNING
Use permitted only in certain areas
The S7-300/ET 200M Ex I/O modules are only suitable for use in Class I, div. 2, Group A,
B, C, D, or in non-hazardous areas.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

265

Standards and licenses


B.1 Standards and licenses

CE mark

The automation system S7-300/ET 200M satisfies the requirements and protection goals of
the following EC directives, and conforms with the harmonized European standards (EN) for
programmable logic controllers announced in the Official Journals of the European
Community:
2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits" (Lowvoltage Directive)
2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Systems for Use in Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres" (Directive for Explosion Protection)
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the responsible authorities at:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industry Sector I IA AS R&D DH A
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg, Germany
These files are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, under
"Declaration of Conformity" on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200).

Safety standards used


The following safety standards apply to all EX modules:
EN 60079-0:
Electrical equipment for hazardous locations:
General specifications.
EN 60079-11:
Electrical equipment for hazardous locations:
Intrinsic safety "i".
DIN EN 61010 (part 1 v. 3/94):
Safety regulations for electrical measuring and control devices and
laboratory equipment.
DIN EN 61131 (part 2 v. 5/95):
Programmable logic controllers, operational equipment requirements and testing.
DIN EN 60204 (part 1 v. 6/93):
Electrical equipment of machines:
General requirements.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

266

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Standards and licenses


B.1 Standards and licenses
Safety-related characteristic values:
Uo

Maximum output voltage

Io

Maximum output current

Um

Maximum r.m.s. power-frequency voltage or maximum direct voltage

Co

Maximum external capacitance

Lo

Maximum external inductance

Po

Maximum output power

Ci

Maximum internal capacitance

Li

Maximum internal inductance

cULus HAZ. LOC. - approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with


UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4
Note the following information.
Note
This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.
When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be
mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

267

Standards and licenses


B.1 Standards and licenses

WARNING
Installation Instructions according cULus
WARNING Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known
to be non-hazardous.
WARNING Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class
I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone
2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with


Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

ATEX approval

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;


Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

Marking for Australia

The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements of the


EN 61000-6-4 standard.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

268

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Standards and licenses


B.1 Standards and licenses

IEC 61131
The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements and criteria of the IEC
61131-2 standard (programmable controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests).

Marine approval
Classification authorities:
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environment


SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.
Table B- 1

Use in industrial environment


Area of application

Requirement for
Interference emission

Industry

EN 61000-6-4: 2007

Interference immunity
EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Use in residential areas


Note
The S7-300/Et 200M is designed for use in industrial areas; using it in residential areas could
disturb radio and TV reception.
If you use the S7-300/ET 200M in residential areas, you must ensure that the radio
interference emissions comply with limit value class B in accordance with EN 61000-6-3.
Suitable measures for achieving RF interference Limit Class B include, for example:
Install S7-300/ET 200M in grounded switching cabinets/boxes
Use of filters in supply lines

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

269

Standards and licenses


B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

270

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Service & support


C.1

Service & support

Technical support
You can contact technical support for all A&D products using the online
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Support Request form.
Additional information on our technical support is available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service).

Service & support on the Internet


In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base on the Internet.
On the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
There you will find:
Our Newsletter, which constantly provides you with the latest information about your
products.
The documents you require, via our service & support search facility.
A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences.
Your local contact for Automation & Drives from our contact database.
Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more.

Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find
the answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate
office or sales and service location.
The contact details for your partner are available on the Internet
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner/).
A guide to the technical documentation provided for the various SIMATIC products and
systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
The online catalog and order system is available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).

Training center
Siemens offers various courses to get you started with the S7-300 and the SIMATIC S7
automation system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

271

Service & support


C.1 Service & support
in Nuremberg (ZIP code: 90327).
Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

272

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary
AS
--> Automation system

Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller which consists at least of one
CPU, various I/O modules, and operating and monitoring devices.

Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus through which the modules communicate with one
another and through which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection
between the modules is created by the bus connector.
The --> I/O bus is a component of the backplane bus.

Backplane bus active


Backplane bus of the distributed I/O system --> ET 200M, which is made of active bus
modules. This is the prerequisite for a configuration with which "inserting and removing" is
permitted during operation.

Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred. It indicates the number of bits
transferred per second (baud rate = bit rate).
With ET 200 baud rates of 9.6 kBaud up to 12 MBaud are possible.

Bus
Transmission path with two defined ends, shared by all interconnected nodes.
With ET 200 the bus is a two-wire line or a fiber-optic cable.

Bus user
Device which can send, receive and amplify signals via the bus, for example; DP
master, DP slave, RS485 Repeater, active star coupler.

CELENEC
European Committee for Electrical Standards

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

273

Glossary

CiR
CiR (Configuration in RUN) stands for system modification in RUN. System modification in
RUN by means of CiR allows the configuration of units of an active system with distributed
I/O. Process execution is interrupted for the duration of a brief, assignable period. The
process inputs retain their last value during this time period.

Client
A client can request a service from a --> server. A client can, for example, be a program, a
central module (CPU) or a station (e.g. PC). The client and server can exchange data via
PROFIBUS DP by means of master-slave process, for example. A separate transfer
channel can be assigned to each client to coordinate data exchange between several clients
and the server, for example.

Configuration
Assigning modules to subracks / slots and addresses. A distinction is made between actual
configuration (= actual inserted modules) and calculated configuration. You stipulate the
calculated configuration with the help of STEP 7, COM PROFIBUS. The operating system
can thus detect any incorrect assembly at startup.

Configuring (initialize, assign parameters to)


Included in parameterization is the setting of the behavior of a module or a --> field device by
parameters.

CPU
Central processing unit = CPU of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic
unit, memory, operating system, and interface for programming device.

Diagnostic interrupt
Modules which support diagnostics interrupts report system errors detected to the central
CPU.
In SIMATIC S7/M7: With the detection or disappearance of an error (e.g. wire break), the
module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided this interrupt is enabled. The --> CPU
interrupts the processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the
diagnostic interrupt module (OB82).
In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostic interrupt is reproduced within the device-related -->
diagnostics. It can detect errors, like for example, wire breaks, by means of the cyclic
querying of the diagnostics bit in the device-related diagnostics.

Diagnostics
The detection, localization, classification, visualization and further evaluation of errors,
disturbances and messages.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

274

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary

Diagnostics offers monitoring functions that automatically run while the system is in
operation. This hence increases the availability of systems by reducing the installation and
down times.

Diagnostics buffer
The diagnostics buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostics events
can be stored in the order of occurrence.

Distributed I/Os
Represent I/O units which are installed at distributed locations at a greater distance to the
CPU, instead of being implemented in the central rack. Examples:
ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U
DP/AS-I Link
S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface
further DP slaves by Siemens or other manufacturers
The distributed I/Os are connected via --> PROFIBUS-DP with the --> DP master.

DP address
Each bus node must be assigned a unique DP address for PROFIBUS DP.
PC/PG or the ET 200 hand-helds have the DP address "0".
DP-Master and DP slaves have a DP address from the range 1 to 125.

DP master
A master that complies with the IEC 617841:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard is known as a DP
master.

DP slave
A slave running on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS DP protocol in accordance with IEC

61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.

DP standard
The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system in accordance with
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.

Dynamic parameters
In contrast to static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed
dynamically by the user program.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

275

Glossary

Electrically isolated
Electrically isolated I/O modules are isolated from the reference potentials of the control
and load circuit by means of optocoupler, relay contact or transformer circuits. I/O circuits
can be interconnected with a root circuit.

Error handling via OB


If the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. access fault with STEP 7), it calls up
the respective --> organization block (error OB) for this case, in which the further behavior -> of the CPU can be established.

ET 200
The distributed I/O system ET 200 with PROFIBUS DP protocol is a bus system for
interconnecting distributed I/O with a CPU or for interconnecting adequate DP master.
ET 200 features high-speed reaction times as the system only transfers a low data volume
(bytes).
ET 200 is based on the standard EN 50170, Volume 2, --> PROFIBUS.
ET 200 works in accordance with the master slave principle. DP-Masters can, for example,
be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP.
DP slaves can be distributed I/Os ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200U or DP slaves by
Siemens or other manufacturers.

Fault indication
The fault indication is one of the possible reactions of the operating system to a --> runtime
error. The other reaction possibilities are: Error reaction in the user program, STOP state
of the CPU or of IM 153-1.

Fault reaction
Reaction to a runtime error. The operating system can react in the following ways: Put the
programmable controller in the STOP state, call up a --> organization block, whereby the
user can program a reaction, or display an error.

Field
This can be an area of the plant outside the control room where measured values can be
obtained through communication or manipulated values can be sent to actuators.
Or part of a message, e.g. address field or command field, that is dedicated to a particular
function. The dimensions or other regulations for the interpretation of each field are part of
the protocol specification.

Field device
A transducer, that is located on the field and exchanges communication data with the
central system.
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

276

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary

Field device, intelligent (smart device)


A field device with more complex functionality, which includes a microprocessor and the
functions of which can be set via a respective --> parameter assignment toll by the control
room.

FM
FM Approvals, American certification organization for products

frequency shift keying (FSK)


is a data modulation technique that is suitable for the data transport via normal lines. Two
audio frequencies are used for this, in order to code the binary "0" and "1" in the frequency
range 300 - 3000 Hz. With HART protocol the FSK signal is transmitted via a current loop.

FSK
Frequency Shift Keying Frequency shift keying

Ground
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term
reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.
One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.
Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment
on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

Ground
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term
reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.
One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.
Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment
on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

Ground
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term
reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.
One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

277

Glossary

Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment
on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

HART
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. HART is a registered trademark of the --> HART
Communication Foundation.

HART analog modules


Analog modules which, in addition to their analog value, can carry out --> HART
communication. HART analog modules can be used as --> HART interfaces for HART field
devices.

HART commands
The HART field device works as a slave and is controlled by the master by means of HART
commands. The master sets the --> HART parameters or requests data in the form of -->
HART responses.

HART communication
Transmitting data between a master (e.g. HART analog module) and a slave (--> HART field
device) via the --> HART protocol.

HART Communication Foundation


The HART Communication Foundation (HCF) was founded in 1993 in order to market and
further develop the HART protocol. The HCF is an establishment that is not focused on
profits and it is financed by its members.

HART field device


Smart device with additional HART-compatible functionality to enable interpretation of the
HART communication functions.

HART hand-held
The HART hand-held includes the original parameter assignment tool by Fisher-Rosemount
Ltd. for --> HART field devices, which is directly linked to its connections. The --> HART
parameters are set using the HART hand-held.

HART interface
Part of a system with which a --> HART field device can be connected. The HART interface
represents the master for the field device. With reference to the system, the HART interface
however is a slave that can supply the system via various masters. A master represents, e.g.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

278

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary

the --> HART parameter assignment tool. The programmable controller is itself a different
master.

HART parameter
The HART parameters call the configurable features of --> HART field devices, which can be
changed via the --> HART protocol. The setting takes place via a --> HART parameter
assignment tool.

HART parameter assignment tool


The HART parameter assignment tool is used to comfortably set the --> HART parameters. It
can be a --> HART hand-held or a parameter assignment tool that is integrated in the
system, e.g. SIMATIC SIPROM.

HART protocol
The HART protocol is the industry standard for expanded communication with --> HART
field devices. It includes the --> HART commands and the --> HART responses.

HART responses
The HART field devices transmits data upon the request of the master. These data represent
measurement results, manipulated values or the values of HART parameters. A HART
response always includes a status information, the --> HART status byte.

HART signal
Analog signal on a current loop from 4 - 20 mA, where the aid of the --> FSK procedure, the
sinus waves for the --> HART protocol, 1200 Hz for the binary "1" and 2200 Hz for the binary
"0" can be modulated.

HART status byte


The status information that consists of the 1st and 2nd status byte of the --> HART response
and with which the HART field device offers information via the --> HART communication,
the receipt of the --> HART command and the device status.

HART transfer area


Area of data records that are established for writing HART commands and reading HART
responses with the HART analog modules. The HART transfer area consists of records.
Each --> client is assigned its own range of data records, with which the --> server can
exchange data with the client.

HCF
--A HART Communication Foundation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

279

Glossary

I/O bus
Component of the --> S7-300 backplane bus in the --> programmable controller system,
optimized at the fast exchange of signals between the IM 153 and the signal modules. The
I/O bus is used to transfer process data, such as digital input signals of a signal module
and system data, such as the default parameter records of a signal module.

Interrupt
The operating system of the --> CPU recognizes 10 different priority classes that regulate the
editing of the user program. These priority classes include interrupts (e.g. hardware
interrupts). When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls an
assigned OB in which the user can program the desired reaction.

KEMA
Certification office for products

Load mains device


Power supply to the signal / function modules and the process I/O connected to them.

Master class 1
--> Master that carries out the user data traffic and with which the configuration and
diagnostics of the distributed I/Os takes place.

Master class 2
--> Master for controlling / installing and configuration tasks, e.g. configuring and diagnostics
of the field devices that are connected to the distribution I/Os.

Master slave procedure


Bus access method where only one node is DP master, and all other nodes are DP
slaves.

Masters
A master station which is in possession of the token can send data to other nodes and
request data from those (= active node.)
DP-Masters can, for example, be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP.

Measuring-point tag
Unique identifier for the measuring point, consisting of 8 characters. It is saved in the -->
HART field device and can be changed and read off via the --> HART command.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

280

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary

modem
A modem (modulator / demodulator) is a device that converts binary digital signals into -->
FSK signals and vice-versa. A modem doesnt code data, it offers a conversion of the
physical form of the signals.

Module parameters
Module parameters are values using which the behavior of the module can be modified. We
distinguish between static and dynamic module parameters.

Monodrop
In a monodrop communication system a maximum of two devices are linked to the same
transmission path, e.g. channel of the HART analog module and --> HART field device. The -> HART protocol and the analog signal can be used simultaneously with this procedure. (By
contrast, a communication system with more than two devices has the multidrop feature)

Non-isolated
The reference potentials of non-isolated I/O modules and of the control and load circuit are
interconnected electrically.

OB
--> organization block

organization blocks
form the interface between the operating system of the S7-CPU and the user program. The
sequence of processing the user program is established in the organization blocks.

Parameter assignment tool


A SW tool using which the parameters e.g. of an --> intelligent field device can be set.

Potentially explosive atmosphere


This is an area in which there is an explosion hazard or where due to local and operating
conditions a dangerous explosive atmosphere can occur.

Primary variable
Variable for the master measured value of a HART analog input, for example, pressure. The
HART field devices also support the implementation of other measuring processes, for
example temperature measurements, and save the results to the second, third, or fourth
variable and so forth. With a HART analog output the primary variable includes the
manipulated variable.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

281

Glossary

Process image
Special memory area of the automation system. At the start of the cyclic program the
signal states of the input modules are transferred to the process image of the inputs. At the
end of the cyclic program the process image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to
the output modules.

Process interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-capable S7-300 modules due to a certain event
in the process. Process interrupts are reported to the central CPU. The assigned
organization block is then processed according to the priority of this interrupt.
In SIMATIC S7/M7: The range is defined by parameterization of an upper and a lower limit.
The module triggers a process interrupt if the process signal of an analog signal module
such as the temperature is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are
enabled. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority
class in order to execute process interrupt OB 40.
In SIMATIC S5: The process interrupt is mapped within the device-specific diagnostics
function. You can identify errors such as violation of limits by means of cyclic polling of the
diagnostics bits in the device-specific diagnostics data.

PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS. This is an international process and fieldbus standard as defined in
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical
characteristics of a serial bit stream field bus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that connects PROFIBUS compatible automation systems and
field devices on a cell and field level.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= Distributed Peripherals), FMS (= Fieldbus
Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological Functions).

PTB
Physical Technical Federal Organization, Certification Office for Products

Reaction time
The reaction time is the average time that elapses between the changing of an input and the
associated changing of an output.

Reference potential
Reference potential for the evaluation / measuring of the voltages of participating circuits.

Runtime error
Error that occurs during the editing of the user program in the --> programmable controller
(also no in the process).
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

282

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Glossary

S7-300 backplane bus


Backplane bus for the S7-300 system. The same backplane bus can also be used for the
distributed I/O system --> ET 200M. There the use of the active backplane bus is also
possible (--> backplane bus, active)

Server
A server provides a service upon request. A server can, for example, be a program, a
module or a station (e.g. PC). The data exchange between the --> A client and server can,
for example, take place via PROFIBUS-DP in the --> master slave procedure.

SFC
--> system function

Signal module
Signal modules form the interface between the process and the automation system. There
are digital input and output modules as well as analog input and output modules.

Slave
A slave can only exchange data with the master upon request from the same.

SM
--> signal module

Static parameters
Unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user
program. You can only modify these parameters in STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS.

Structure, central
In a centralized configuration, the process I/O devices and central module are located in the
same rack or in expansion units in the same or a neighboring cabinet.

Structure, distributed
The process I/O of a distributed configuration is not installed directly alongside with the CPU
in the same rack or in the same/adjacent cabinet. Distributed I/Os are installed at remote
locations and interconnected via communication bus system.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

283

Glossary

Substitute value
Substitute values are values which are output by faulty signal output modules to the process,
or used to substitute a process value of a faulty signal input module in the user program. The
substitute values can be set by the user (for example, retain old values)

System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and the report of errors that occur within the
programmable controller. Examples for such errors are: Program errors or failure of
modules. System errors can be displayed with LED displays or in the STEP 7.

System function
A system function is a function integrated in the operating system of the --> CPU which upon
request can be called up in the STEP 7 user program.

Terminating resistor
power adaptation resistor connected to the bus cable. Always required at the end of cables
or segments.
The ET 200 bus connectors are equipped with switched terminating resistors.

Timeout
If an expected event does not occur within a specified time, this time is known as a "timeout".
In the --> HART protocol there is a timeout for the response of a slave to a message from the
master and for the pause after each transaction.

Transducer
Sensor, measuring transducer, actuator or final control element. A transducer can be
implemented by means of a smart device.

User data
User data is exchanged between a central module and signal module, function module and
communication modules via the process image or via direct access. User data could be:
digital and analog input/output signals from signal modules, control and status information
from function modules.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

284

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Index
"
"Intrinsic safety" terminals, 38

2
2-wire transducer
connecting, 126
Ranges of measurement, 161

4
4-wire transducer
connecting, 126
Measuring ranges, 186
Ranges of measurement, 161

A
ADU error,
Analog digital conversion, 129
analog input module
Conversion time, 128
Cycle time, 129
electrically isolated, 114
Parameterization, 130
Analog input module
Diagnostic data records, 143
Diagnostics, 135
Interrupt, 139
Operating state of the CPU, influence, 141
Range of values, 142
Supply voltage, influence, 141
Analog input, measurement range, 95
analog output module
electrically isolated, 127
Analog output module
Conversion time, 129
Cycle time, 130
Diagnostic data records, 143
Diagnostics, 135
Interrupt, 139
Operating state of the CPU, influence, 141
Parameterization, 130
Range of values, 142

Response time, 130


Supply voltage, influence, 141
Transient recovery time, 130
Analog signal, line, 121, 127
Analog value, 95
Analog value representation, 95
Climatic temperature range, 101
Climatic temperature range Ni 100, 102
Current measuring range, 98
Current output ranges, 112
Resistance sensor, 99
Standard temperature range Ni 100, 100
Temperature range encoder types, 103
Temperature range standard, 99
Voltage measuring range, 97
Approval, 17
ATEX, 268
CE, 266
Domestic, 269
FM, 268
FM approval, 18
Industry, 269
Marine, 269
Approvals, 4
ATEX approval, 268
Australia, marking, 268
Auxiliary voltage,

B
Backplane bus, 19
Basic knowledge, required, 3
Bit, noise-prone, 96
Block diagram
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA,

C
cable bedding, 32
Cable routing in Ex systems, 30
Cables
Cable routing in the cable bedding, 32
Marking, 32
Overview of requirements, 33
selection, 34

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

285

Index

Shielding, 47
Types of cables, 35
Causes of error and remedies
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA,
CE mark, 266
Certificates of conformity, 263
Changes since the previous edition of the manual, 3
Climatic, Ni 100, temperature range, 102
Climatic, temperature range, 101
compensation box, 124
Compensation box, 117
Compensation with thermocouples
external, 124
internal, 125
Configuration tool
HART, 180
IM 153-2, 181
IM 153-4, 181
Connect voltage transducer, 125
connecting
2-wire transducer, 126
4-wire transducer, 126
Ex I/O modules, 19
Line chamber, 20
Resistance thermometer, 121
Transducers, 114
Connecting
loads/actuators, 127
Thermocouple, 116
Voltage sensor, 125
Connecting actuators, 127
Connecting loads, 127
Connection system, 113
Conversion time
analog input module, 128
Analog output module, 129
CPU error,
C-tick mark, 4
Current output range, analog value representation, 112
Cycle time
analog input module, 129
Analog output module, 130

D
Data record format

Additional diagnostics, HART field devices, 214


Additional parameters for HART, 216
Diagnostics of the HART analog input, 208, 250
HART communication, 210, 252
Data record interface
HART analog module, 205, 245
Parameter, 206, 247
Diagnostic data record
Structure, analog modules, 143
Structure, digital modules, 92
Diagnostic interrupt, 140
Diagnostic messages,
Diagnostics
Analog modules general, 135
Data records, analog modules, 143
Data records, digital modules, 92
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA,
Diagnostics of the HART analog input
Data record DS0 / DS1, 208, 250
Data record DS1, 209, 251
Data record format, 208, 250
Digital module
Diagnostic data records, 92
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
Disposal, 4
Distribution of plants, 46
DM 370 dummy module
combined use, 19
Installation information, 23
Documentation structure, 4

E
Electrical isolation, 114
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 44
EPROM error,
Equipment Shielding, 39
Equipotential bonding
additional, 29
General, 27
in a building, 28
Lightning protection, 47
Main equipotential bonding, 29
ET 200M
S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

286

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Index

Distribution, 46
Installation information for Ex I/O, 26
Ex area,
Ex I/O module
connecting, 19
Design of ET 200M with an example, 26
replacing, 20
S7-300 installation information, 23
Safety standards, 266
Ex installation
Zone 1, 53
Zone 2, 53
Ex lines
Shielding, 42
Ex partition, 19, 26
Ex systems
Guideline, 17
Wiring and cabling, 30
example
HART configuration, 182
Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas
compressor station, 49

F
Field devices for HART, 177, 180, 214
FM approval, 268
Functional extra low voltage, safe, 18
Fuse blown,

G
Grounding
Inactive metal parts, 43
intrinsically safe circuits, 41
Guideline
Ex systems, 17
HART communication, 210, 253

H
Hardware interrupt
HART analog module, 190, 230
Hardware interrupt lost,
HART, 177
application, 180
Configuration tool, 180
Diagnostic messages, 225
Example of commands, 179
Example of parameters, 179
functions, 178

Group error, 213


Introduction, 177
Protocol error, 213
Status bytes, 180, 189
System environment, 180
User data format input, 218, 259
various diagnostic messages, 188
HART - modifying parameters,
HART analog module
Data record interface, 205, 245
Diagnostics, 188, 225
Example configuration, 182
HART measurement, 187
Installation, 183
Interrupt, 189, 230
Intrinsically safe installation, 183
Operating phase, 184
Reassign parameters, 184
Use in PROFIBUS DP, 176
User data, 205, 245
HART communication
Command, data record, 211, 254
Data record format, 210, 252
Response, data record, 212, 255
HART data records
Additional diagnostics for field devices, 214
Additional parameters, 216
Communications, 210, 252
Diagnostics, 208, 250
Input parameter, 206, 247
Output parameter, 207, 248
User data, output, 219, 260
HART group error, 213
HART operating phase
Field devices, 185
User data, 184
HART protocol, 178
HART protocol error, 213
HART response
Data record format, 212, 255
evaluating, 212, 255
HART signal
FSK procedure, 178
Influence with transducers, 162
HART status bytes, 189, 213

I
IEC 61131, 269
Incorrect parameters,
Installation
General information, 23

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

287

Index

Racks, spacing, 24
Zone 1, 53
Zone 2, 53
Installation of the HART analog module, 183
interference voltage, 42
Interrupts
Analog modules, 139
HART analog modules, 189, 230
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
Intrinsic safety, 38
Intrinsically safe electrical circuit
Cable routing requirements, 30
Grounding, 41
Intrinsically safe installation,

L
Lightning protection
Equipotential bonding, 47
Lightning Protection, 45
external, 46
internal, 47
Lightning strike, measures, 50
Line
Analog signals, 121, 127
Cable routing in the cable bedding, 32
Characteristic value of intrinsically safe circuits, 38
Marking, 32
Overview of requirements, 33
selection, 34
Type designations, 36
Line chamber, 20
Line shielding, 40
Load current circuit, 19
Load voltage missing,

M
Maintaining equipment, 57
Manual
Changes, 3
Contents, 4
Purpose, 3
Marine approval, 269
Marking
Cables, 32
Line, 32
Marking for Australia, 268
Measured value resolution, 96

Measured value table, 96


Measurement
Resistance sensor, 121
Resistance thermometer, 121
Measurement of current, measuring ranges,
overview, 98
measures
to counteract overvoltage, 45
Measures
Eliminating the risk of explosion, 52
Safety Measures, 51
to counteract, 42
with a lightning strike, 50
Measuring ranges
HART analog input, 206, 247
HART analog output, 207, 248
Undershoot,
Violation,
Module not configured,

O
Operating state of the CPU, influence
Analog modules, 141
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA,
Order number
6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0, 190
6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0, 231
6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0, 198
6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0, 238
all at a glance,
Order Number
6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0, 59
6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0, 85
6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0, 73
6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0, 158
6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0, 146
6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0, 166
Overvoltage Protection, 48
Example gas compressor station, 49
in intrinsically safe circuits, 48

P
parameter
Additional parameters for HART, data record
format, 216
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,
SM 331; AI 4 x 4/0...20 mA,

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

288

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Index

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA,


Parameter
HART data records, 206, 247
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
Parameterization
HART access rights, 185
Interrupt, 139
Partition, 19
Potentially explosive atmosphere
Eliminating the risk of explosion, 52
Ex installation in zone 1, 53
Ex installation in zone 2, 53
Safety measures for mounting, 51
Power supply, 19
Process interrupt
Analog modules, 140
PROFIBUS DP with HART analog modules, 176

R
RAM error,
Range of values, influence on output, 142
Ranges of measurement
2-wire transducer, 161
4-wire transducer, 161
Analog input, 95
Resistance measurement, 150
Voltage measurement, 150
Recycling, 4
Reference channel fault,
Reference junction, 123
Replacing equipment, 57
Replacing Ex I/O modules, 20
Requirements
Cables, 33
Line, 33
terminals, 38
Resistance measurement SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
Resistance sensor
Analog value representation, 99
Measurement, 121
Resistance thermometer, 121
Response time, analog output module, 130

S
S7 Ex analog modules, 17, 95
S7 Ex digital modules, 17, 59

S7 Ex-HART analog modules, 17, 175


S7-300
Installation information for Ex I/O, 23
Wiring of the Ex I/O, 24
Safety, 267
Safety measures for mounting, 51
Safety standards Ex modules, 266
Service & support, 271
Shielding
building, 46, 47
Cables, 47
Definition, 39
Equipment, 39
Ex lines, 42
Line, 40
Systems with optimal equipotential bonding, 40
Shielding of buildings, 47
Short-circuit to M,
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
Block diagram,
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Features,
Interrupts,
Intrinsically safe installation,
Parameter,
Parameterization,
technical specifications,
Wiring diagram,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA
Block diagram,
Parameter,
Wiring diagram,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Features,
Interrupts,
Intrinsically safe installation,
technical specifications,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA,
Block diagram,
Wiring diagram,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Features,
Interrupts,
Intrinsically safe installation,
parameter,
Parameterization,
Technical specifications,

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

289

Index

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,


Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Features,
Parameter,
Technical specifications,
Wiring diagram,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
Features,
Intrinsically safe installation,
Parameter,
technical specifications,
Wire-break monitoring,
Wiring diagram,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Features,
Intrinsically safe installation,
Parameter,
Resistance measurement,
technical specifications,
Thermocouples,
Wire-break monitoring,
Wiring diagram,
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
Features,
Parameter,
Technical specifications,
Wire break check,
Wiring diagram,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
Features,
Intrinsically safe installation,
Parameter,
technical specifications,
Wiring diagram,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA
Causes of error and remedies,
Diagnostics,
Spacing on subracks, 24
Sparks capable of causing ignition, 51
Standard Ni 100 temperature range, 100
Standard, temperature range, 99
Standards, 4
Supply voltage, influence
Analog modules, 141
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,

T
technical specifications
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
Technical specifications
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 332; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA,
Temperature ranges, analog value representation
Climatic, 101
Climatic, Ni 100, 102
Encoder types, 103
Standard, 99
Standard Ni 100, 100
Thermocouple
Compensation at terminals, 119
Compensation box, 117
Compensation with RTD, 120
external compensation, 116, 120, 124
General information, 122
Internal compensation, 116, 121, 125
operating principle, 123
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
Wiring options, 116
Thread measure, minimum, 18
Time monitoring,
Training center, 271
Transducers
connecting, 114
insulated, 114
non-insulated, 115
Transient recovery time, analog output module, 130
Type designations
Lines, harmonized standards, 36
Telecommunication cables and lines, 37
Types of protection, 53

U
Use
combined, 19
In industry, 269
in residential areas, 269
S7 Ex modules, 17
User data
HART analog input, 218, 259
HART analog module, 205, 245
HART analog output, 219, 260

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

290

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

Index

V
Validity of the manual, 3
Voltage measurement
Measuring ranges, overview, 97
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,

W
Watchdog,
Wire break,
Wire break check
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
Wire-break monitoring
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
Wiring
ET 200M, 26
S7-300, 24
Wiring diagram
SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,
SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA,
SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA,
SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA,
SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD,
SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART,
SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA,

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules


Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

291

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

292

Manual, 09/2014, A5E00172008-11

You might also like